JP7375846B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won at an operating port provided in a gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur. Fluctuation display starts. If the lottery is won, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention level to the games.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a grant determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a benefit to a player;
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game machine comprising a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to
The game time control means has a period determining means for determining the operation period of the game time operation for each game time,
The gaming machine is
comprising a performance execution means for performing a performance when the game repeat operation is being performed,
As one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a first predetermined performance is provided, the performance execution period of which is configured to be shorter than the operation period,
comprising an execution number determining means capable of determining the number of executions of the first predetermined effect to be executed during a game round based on specific information corresponding to the operation period;
As the number of executions of the first predetermined performance, the number of executions determining means determines a predetermined number of times that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit number of times corresponding to the type of the specific information based on the determination result by the provision determining means, and It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance,
In a predetermined game round in which the first predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, a second predetermined effect having a longer effect execution period than the first predetermined effect can be executed. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. It is a front view showing the composition of an inner frame. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board unit. It is a perspective view of the game board unit seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a back pack unit. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. It is a schematic diagram showing a validity table. They are (a), (b) a schematic diagram showing a distribution table, and (c) a schematic diagram showing a relationship between winning types and support modes. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. (a) Flowchart showing the process of setting the variable display time, (b) Schematic diagram showing the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence referenced in the low-frequency support mode, (c) Referenced in the high-frequency support mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for reach non-occurrence. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration concerning a notification/performance control device and a display control device. It is a flow chart showing variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows processing for a fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special production modes. (a) A schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of pseudo-continuous fluctuation display. (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of a game performance corresponding to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the color of the effect and the jackpot expectation level. (a) A schematic diagram showing the display contents in the time-saving performance mode, and (b) a timing chart showing the flow of the game performance. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of game performance during time-saving performance mode. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a pending notice performed by MPU of a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a pending command setting process executed by the MPU of the main control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow of a preview performance, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the variable display mode in each production mode. (a) A flowchart showing a special performance setting process for a special performance mode executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device, and (b) a flowchart showing a special performance setting process for reach. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for reach. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating a first special pattern table, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating a second special pattern table. It is a timing chart showing the flow of game performance according to the first special performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing the flow of game performance according to the second special performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process for complete misses. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st setting process. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating a fifth special pattern table, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating a sixth special pattern table. It is a timing chart showing the flow of game effects using the fifth special pattern and the sixth special pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating a ninth special pattern table, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating a tenth special pattern table. It is a timing chart showing the flow of game performance using the 9th special pattern and the 10th special pattern. It is a schematic diagram showing a comparison. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the start timing of reach display and the number of parts in a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for cooperation performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between previous and subsequent game rounds. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the fixed display time of a pattern and the stop display time of a pattern. (a) A flowchart showing the standby display control process executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and whether standby display is possible. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of game performance. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the fixed display time of a pattern and the stop display time of a pattern.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first form of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be explained in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame members on four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape as a whole. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall or the like.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable/closable state. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. These upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18 constitute a support mechanism, and the support mechanism allows the main part 12 of the gaming machine to rotate on the left side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 11. , can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a front door frame 14 disposed behind the inner frame 13. A back pack unit 15 is provided. It should be noted that an inner frame 13 of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation end side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. There is.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A generally elliptical window 21 is formed in the center of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. It is closed from the back side of the door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition section that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 into front and rear sections, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear directions with the partition section in between. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the gaming area PE is covered twice from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination section 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21 . The annular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when a jackpot is won or when a predetermined reach is reached. Furthermore, an error display lamp section 27 is provided at the center of the annular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, which lights up when a malfunction such as an error occurs. A prize ball lamp section 28 that lights up is provided. In addition, speaker sections 29 are provided at positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28, respectively, to output sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the gaming state (see FIG. 3). The speaker section 29 suppresses monotony of the game by switching BGM etc. according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge portion 31 and a lower bulge portion 32 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to a game ball firing mechanism described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33, and a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 and storing game balls that have not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls fired by the game ball firing mechanism. It functions as a receptacle for storing ejected game balls when the balls are returned to the player.

A game ball firing handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball firing handle 41, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism which will be described later. The firing speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (amount of rotation) of the game ball firing handle 41 increases, and when this amount of operation is adjusted by the player and reaches a predetermined amount, the game ball is fired. It will reach area PE. In addition, by adjusting this amount of operation by the player, it becomes possible to separately hit the game ball to the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back side of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a socket part that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner thereof, and by partitioning the socket part into left and right sides by a partition wall, the entrance of the upper tray passage on the front door side is formed. section and an entrance section of the front door side lower plate passage are formed into sections. The upper tray passage on the front door side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are connected on the upstream side to a game ball distribution section which will be described later, and the game balls that have entered the upper tray passage on the front door side are guided to the upper tray 33 and are passed through the lower tray passage on the front door side. The game balls entering the tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side, protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends thereof. These protruding shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that in FIG. 5 as well as in FIG. 3, the configuration within the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be posted. Note that a slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front surface of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5). Although not shown, the support fittings 71 and 72 have shaft parts, and by inserting the bearing parts provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft parts, the front door frame is attached to the inner frame 13. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and has front door hook members 76 arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). have. In the inner frame base body 50, a hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front door frame 14 has a slit for protruding toward the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook members 76 protruding through these slits are locked to the hook receiving members 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, so that the front door can be opened. The frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 (see FIG. 4) that extends toward the rear side of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main section 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). The locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the inner frame 13 is unlocked.

An accommodating recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The storage recess is recessed toward the rear of the game machine in accordance with the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed by a manual locking mechanism while being fitted into the storage recess 51 from the front of the game machine. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess 51, and the back structure of the game board unit 80 (back surface block 80b to be described later) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13 through this window hole 52. . It should be noted that almost the entire area of the window hole 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 includes a game area forming body 80a in which a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the front side, and is provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and includes various game parts (for example, a variable display unit, a control unit, etc.) to be described later. device, a movable presentation mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are mounted on the base body 251 and are integrated with the back block 80b. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front part of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the game area PE is covered by the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is designed so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE are arranged so that they are not lined up one after the other at the same location. This suppresses ball clogging in the gaming area PE.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be explained based on FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the rear.

A plurality of large and small openings are formed in the game area forming body 80a, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game area forming body 80a. As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning hole 81, a variable winning device 82, operating holes 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc., respectively. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entering portion, and the detection result is Based on this, benefits such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) are given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowest part of the gaming area forming body 80a, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry areas are discharged from the gaming area PE through the out port 89. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out port 89, the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning". express.

In addition, a large number of nail members 93 are installed in the game area forming body 80a in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 94 are installed. has been done. Various configurations such as the nail member 93 and the windmill 94 differentiate the flow paths of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winnings to the above-mentioned general prize opening 81 etc. occur with a moderate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the gaming area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the gaming area forming body 80a. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 252 and the like belonging to the back block 80b are located, and the variable display unit 252 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). There is. In addition, in FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the aperture cover 86 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and a state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible is shown.

Operating ports 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc. are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating ports 83a, 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a disposed below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b disposed directly below the upper operating port 83a. The (lottery-triggered ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening/closing ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit, thereby preventing the ball from entering the lower operating port 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (auxiliary state) in which the ball is allowed to enter the ball, and a closed state (non-assistant state) in which the same ball cannot enter the ball. Note that it is sufficient that the closed state of the electric accessory 91 makes it difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state, and it is not necessarily necessary to prohibit the entry of the ball.

In the gaming area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position upstream of the lower operation opening 83b (more specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 252), and the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is triggered. If the lottery results in a winner, the electric accessory 91 will be switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, when a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to increase the advantage of the lower operating port 83b over the upper operating port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of pieces to be dispensed by the lower operating port 83b to be larger than the number of pieces to be dispensed by the upper operating port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 82 is formed with a grand prize opening leading to the back side of the gaming area forming body 80a, and an opening/closing member (opening/closing member) for opening and closing the grand prize opening. An opening/closing door is provided as means). The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state) in which game balls can enter the game ball, and a closed state (non-auxiliary state) in which the game ball cannot enter. In addition, the opening/closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the gaming area forming body 80a, and under normal conditions, the opening/closing door is maintained in the closed state and the internal lottery If you win the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) in (Jackpot: when the result is a transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), you will be able to switch to the open state. It has become. Note that it is sufficient that the closed state of the door makes it difficult for the ball to enter the door compared to the open state, and it is not necessarily necessary to prohibit the entry of the ball.

The opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. The opening mode of the variable prize winning device 82 in the opening/closing execution mode is, for example, a plurality of rounds (for example, 4, 8, 16 rounds), where one round is defined as the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10). The opening/closing door is set to be opened repeatedly up to the upper limit.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display unit 252. The variable display unit 252 includes a symbol display device 253 that variably displays symbols (fluctuating display) using winnings to the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be displayed variably. If you win a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols (symbol combination) will be stopped and displayed on the preset active line, and you will move to the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state or jackpot). . Note that the symbol display device 253 does not necessarily need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 80a so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from the front side thereof, and when it is fixed in this way, it stands up from the front side of the game area forming body 80a. The gap between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are prevented from colliding with the symbol display device 253, and the falling path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is set so that the variable display unit 252 (more specifically, the center frame 95) is on the right side. There are two main routes: one that detours from the center and one that detours from the left side.

On the upper surface of the frame part constituting the lower part of the center frame 95, a stage part is formed on which the game ball can roll left and right. Game balls flowing in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through the warp passages also formed in the center frame 95. The stage section is configured so that the game ball that has reached the stage section can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, which increases the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage section. Contributing to In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by the transparent opening cover 86, and the game ball that has reached the stage section is restricted from moving toward the back block 80b (variable display unit 252). has been done.

The operating ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since it is possible to shift to a special gaming state using a winning at the operating ports 83a, 83b as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not a winning occurs at the operating ports 83a, 83b, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is paid to the symbol display device 253. The fact that the operating ports 83a and 83b are provided closer to the variable display unit 252 is a contrivance for concentrating the player's attention around the variable display unit 252.

A game area dividing member 99 that defines a game area PE together with a guide rail 100, which will be described later, is disposed at the right end of the game area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the game board unit 80, which will be described later). A stopper member with which a game ball flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collides is provided in the game area dividing member 99. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member will flow down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. In other words, the stopper member is provided with an energy reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area dividing member 99, and a part thereof is arranged to face the glass unit 22. A main display section D on which a predetermined picture or the like is displayed is provided in this opposing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device to be described later, and the display contents of the main display section D are controlled by the main control device.

The main display section D includes an upper operating port display section UD that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating port display section UD that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the lower operating port 83b. and a mouth display section LD. In the display section UD for the upper operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the upper operating port 83a as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery conducted based on a winning to the upper operating port 83a is performed. The results are clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the upper operating port 83a is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the upper operating port display section, and a predetermined result is displayed as the stop result. After the picture is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display section LD for the lower operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the lower operating port 83b as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery conducted based on a winning to the lower operating port 83b is performed. The results are clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the lower operating port display section LD, and a predetermined picture is displayed as the stopped result. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is entered according to the result.

Here, based on winning to either of the operating ports 83a, 83b, a variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display parts UD, LD, and after the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the corresponding The period in which the symbols are stopped and displayed until a predetermined stop display time (determined display time) elapses (until the final display ends) corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ports 83a, 83b, that single display area is displayed. In a configuration in which a variable display is performed in a display area, the variable display starts in the single display area, and the predetermined stop result is displayed until the fixed display ends after the variable display is stopped. It is also possible to make it one game time. It should be noted that the display of changing patterns on the display parts UD and UL for each actuation port does not necessarily have to be started when an internal lottery based on winnings to the actuation ports 83a and 83b is executed; It is also possible to configure the system to start before the internal lottery based on winnings is executed.

In addition to the above-mentioned two display sections, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through gate display section that displays lottery results based on winnings in the through gate 84. In the display section for the through gate, a changing display of symbols is performed using a win in the through gate 84 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of an internal lottery conducted based on a win in the through gate 84 is clearly displayed. be done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 84 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result will be displayed on the through gate display section and the fluctuation display will be displayed. After being stopped, it transitions to the power open state. In the electrically powered open state, the electrically powered accessory 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the main display portion D of the main display unit 87 displays the number of held balls. A display section for the number of reservations is provided.

The main display section D described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are prevented from moving in front of the main display section D. The visibility is guaranteed.

To explain the structure of the inner frame 13 again using FIG. 5, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is ejected to the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball ejecting handle 41. A game ball firing mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball firing mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball launcher located at the launch standby position. The main components include a ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 to which various components 111 to 113 are attached, and when the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base 50, the same It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game area forming body 80a side. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed in the firing rail 112, and the game ball is fitted into the groove portion to define the front and rear positions of the game ball.

A ball stopper is arranged near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112 to keep the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the firing standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source/launch control device that will be described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply/launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is moved toward the gaming area forming body 80a side. is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100, together with a game area dividing member 99 fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate), divides and forms the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. There is. Further, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by these rails 101 and 102. has been done. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112→guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104→exit portion 105). In addition, in the gaming area forming body 80a, on the forward side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a back-preventing member 106 that prevents the gaming balls that have reached the gaming area PE from returning into the guiding passage 103. is attached to prevent the game ball that reached the game area PE first from interfering with the launch of the following game ball.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 is in the shape of an arc centered approximately at the center of the gaming area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide path 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within the ball. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to deliver it to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide path 103 substantially constitutes a passage area (passing route) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is an area through which the game ball does not substantially pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip end of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other across the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a. It is located in That is, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted from side to side near the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a. This allows both rails 100, 112 to approach the lower edge of the game area forming body 80a, while forming a gap at a predetermined interval between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112.

A foul ball passage is provided below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide path 103 as foul balls, those foul balls will enter the foul ball path through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to a lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that have entered the foul ball passage are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. 1. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be fired.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the gaming area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled alone during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time the outer rail 102 may collide with the game machine or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member installed in view of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function to prevent the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above factors.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14), which penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front and rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is disposed at. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution section to be described later. Further, a socket part of a passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing members 124 are biased to a forward position that closes the main body side upper pan passage 122 and the main body side lower pan passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening/closing member 124 is biased by this biasing force. By being in the closed state, falling of game balls from each passage 122, 123 is avoided. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open by the socket provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back structure of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be explained based on FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation proximal end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. As shown in FIG. Bearing parts 133 are formed in the bearing fitting 132 at vertically spaced intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, the bottom part of the storage recess (game board storage part) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 is penetrated in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 accommodated in the accommodation recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back side of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back side of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 that is open to the side of the game area forming body 80a, and when this base body 251 is fixed to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, the game area is formed. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging movable presentation mechanisms, decorative members that can emit light, etc., and the back side thereof is a control device for controlling these various components and the variable display unit 252 (design display device). 253).

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and its symbol display device are attached to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving 253 is attached. The symbol display device 253 and the display control device are arranged one on top of the other in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) such that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side. Further, a notification/presentation control device 140 is mounted on the back side of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification/effect control device 140 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later.The notification/effect control board is transparent. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140 so as to cover the base body 96 from behind. The main controller unit 160 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b), and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 consisting of, etc.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 serving as a sealing means, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing parts 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing part 164 as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in an unsealable manner. The base and the box cover are joined together in an unopenable manner. The sealing process performed by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening of the box after it has been sealed, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after opening the package, it is possible to reseal it. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole among the plurality of box sealing parts 164. When the board box 163 is unsealed in the event of a malfunction of the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing part into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is removed. cut. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, if the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163 that the board box 163 has been opened illegally.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a base sealing portion 165. Specifically, the pedestal sealing part 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin like the box sealing part 164, and when the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole, the base sealing part 165 is connected to the board box 163. The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. This makes it easier to identify the fact that the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

A portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the gaming area forming body 80a has a portion corresponding to the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, the operating openings 83a and 83b, and a downstream side. A collection passageway (not shown) is formed on the side that gathers at one place. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general prize opening 81 etc. are configured to gather below the game board unit 80 via the collection path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 89 also communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

In addition, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b includes a general winning hole detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 81 as a detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entering portions, and an operating hole 83a. , 83b is installed, and a detection sensor for the operating port is installed to detect the game ball that has entered the ball, and a winning detection mechanism is constituted by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signals) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by a back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage panel, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, as shown in FIG. 212. The protective cover section 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the top surface are closed, and only the bottom surface is open, and has a size sufficient to at least surround the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal board 213 is provided on the upper part of the base portion 211. The external output terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and a wiring WH1 connecting the gaming hall side management control device (hall computer HC) and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to these output terminals. Various signals outputted from the external output terminal board 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the status of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming situation, etc. based on these various signals. It is configured to be understood.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins 214 are connected to the bearings provided on the inner frame 13. By being inserted through the portion 133, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions into which fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portions, it is applied to the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism section 202 is disposed on the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 which is disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Ru. A tank rail 222 that slopes gently toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls put out by the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls put out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage described later, and has an inner opening that is connected to the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. has been done.

A discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and back directions. A discharge passage opened to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage panel facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are delivered to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. be discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a mounting base 241 having a horizontally long shape, and a dispensing control device 242 and a power source/firing control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 242 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state recovery switch 245 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power source/launch control device 243, a power source/launch control board is housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and further controls the launch of the game ball as the player operates the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball firing mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to an on state (on state) or a cut off state (off state).

Here, this pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, and even in the event of a power outage, it retains the state at the time of the power outage, and returns to the state at the time of the power outage when recovering from the power outage. It is now possible to do so. For example, when the power is shut off in a normal procedure, such as when a game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided on the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine and exposing the back side of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main section 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches mentioned above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the gaming machine is closed, and can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by someone who does not own the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudulent person). is difficult.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to the block in FIG.

An MPU 402 is mounted on a main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 402 includes a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 402, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403. It is an element that includes a RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 and the functions of the RAM 404, are provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 405 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, etc. are connected to the input side of the MPU 402. A power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 81 (winning), a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects a ball entering the variable winning device 82 (winning), and a top activation sensor. A ball entry detection sensor 391c detects a ball entering the opening 83a (winning), a ball entry detection sensor 391d detects a ball entering the lower operating port 83b (winning), a ball entry detection sensor 391d detects a ball entering the through gate 84 (winning). A ball entry detection sensor 391e is connected to the ball entry detection sensor 391e, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry section. Furthermore, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a and lower operating port 83b, and also executes a support occurrence lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84.

A power outage monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, and a notification/performance control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entering portions such as the above-mentioned operation ports 83a and 83b. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When a winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when a winning to the upper operating port 83a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the paying out of three game balls is output, and a winning to the lower operating port 83b is specified. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

The main control device 162 outputs various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command to the notification/effect control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning drive section that opens and closes the opening/closing body (for example, the shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory drive section that opens and closes the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b, and A main display unit 87 is connected. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 executes drive control of the variable winning prize drive unit so that the variable winning prize device 82 is opened and closed. Furthermore, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Furthermore, the display control of the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 402 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and through this external output terminal board 213 ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information regarding lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming situation, etc. on the hall computer HC.

The power outage monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243, and the power outage monitoring board 405 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243. It has the ability to monitor. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power source/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 401, payout control device 242, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power source/launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 140 is provided with a notification/performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU includes a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM. It has a built-in RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be integrated into separate chips. The MPU of the notification/effect control device 140 drives and controls the lamp sections 26 to 28 and the speaker section 29 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device. 410.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the symbol display device 253 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 140. In this case, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 253 (for example, the presence or absence of a reach-to-reach effect, the content of the reach-to-reach effect, etc.) and the pattern based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The stop display mode (the type of symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed upon completion of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the structure related to the fluctuating display of symbols in each game round and the contents of the fluctuating display will be explained. In addition, in the following description, FIGS. 12 and 13 will be referred to as appropriate. 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, and for convenience of explanation, illustrations of background images and the like displayed on the display screen 253a are omitted.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM contains data for nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9" (see Figures 12(a) to (i)) and data for sub-symbols that are not numbered. (see FIG. 12(j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 253a is configured such that three symbols are displayed in a stopped state for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are displayed in a stopped state. It is now possible to do so. Further, five effective lines are set on the display screen 253a, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination with the same number) is formed on any active line. When the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a jackpot video is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a variable probability jackpot result.

In addition, considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the first symbol row). 2 symbol row), and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

Among the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and those with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) The main pattern corresponds to a "non-specific pattern." In the case of a variable jackpot result, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of a normal jackpot result, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 253 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be vertical.

At the bottom of the display screen 253a, more specifically, below the variable display area ME that is composed of the variable display area for the upper symbol row, the variable display area for the middle symbol row, and the variable display area for the lower symbol row, a pending display is displayed. Area is set. The hold display area is divided and displayed in such a way that the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum hold number when game balls enter the upper operating port 83a are lined up in the left-right direction, and the same number of unit hold display areas as the hold information related to the upper operating port 83a are displayed. A holding number display area Da for the upper operating port in which a holding image can be displayed in the unit display area and a unit holding display area of the same number as the maximum number of holdings when a game ball enters the lower operating port 83b are arranged in the left and right direction. This is executed in the holding number display area Db for the lower actuating port and the variable display area ME, which are divided and displayed in this way, and the same number of holding images as the holding information related to the lower actuating port 83b can be displayed in these unit display areas. and an execution target display area that can display a pending image corresponding to the middle game round.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a, the maximum number of reserved balls is 4, and correspondingly, the reserved number display area Da for the upper operating port includes a first unit reserved display area, A second unit reservation display area, a third unit reservation display area, and a fourth unit reservation display area are set. In addition, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 83b, the maximum number of reserved balls is 4, and correspondingly, the reserved number display area Db for the lower operating port includes a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, and a second unit reserved display area. A unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is one when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a, a predetermined pending image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area, and the game ball enters the upper operating port 83a. When the number of reserved items in the case of winning is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area to the fourth unit pending display area. In FIG. 11(b), the case is illustrated in which the number of objects held in the upper operating port 83a is three, and the number of objects held in the lower operating port 83b is two. Note that in the following explanation, the "number of pending items" is also simply referred to as the "number of pending items."

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 402 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, settings for display on the main display unit 87 (main display section D), settings for display on the symbol display device 253, etc. Specifically, , as shown in FIG. 14, a winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery to generate a jackpot, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a symbol display device 253. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when winning fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the patterns on the actuation opening display parts UD and LD of the main display unit 87. A variable type counter CS is used to determine the variable display time and the variable display time of symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (performance execution time including temporary stop time described later). Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b should be placed in the electric role release state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of an upper operation mouth retention area Ra, a lower operation mouth retention area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reservation number storage area.

The holding ball storage area 432 includes a holding area consisting of an upper working port holding area Ra and a lower working opening holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. Each holding area Ra, Rb includes a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter buffer 431 Each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in is stored in any of the first area to the fourth area as the above-mentioned pending information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first to fourth areas, if winnings to the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b occur multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → fourth area Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in order of area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b can be stored on hold. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 432 is provided with a storage area for the total number of reserved balls, and the total number of reserved balls storage area specifies the number of reserved winning histories of the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. Information for doing so is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area when starting the variable display of the pattern on the actuation opening display parts UD and LD of the main display unit 87. , At the start of one game round, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404, and when a game ball enters the lower operating port 83b, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 404. is stored in

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 421 as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, the validity table includes a validity table for low probability mode (low probability validity information group) and a validity table for high probability mode (high probability validity information group). . That is, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means.

In the game state where the win/fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win are "7" and "307". , "507". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high probability mode winning/failure table (FIG. 15(b)) is referred to in the above lottery, the value of the random number (i.e., winning information) for the jackpot winning is "7", " 36", "107", "307"..."407", "507". There are 30 pieces of "598". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "307"... "407", "507", "598" correspond to the jackpot result. ing. Incidentally, as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in the winning are arbitrary.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a losing result except for the random number value that results in a jackpot win.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are different in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 91 after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

As for the support mode by the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operation port 83b, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the game area PE, the electric function of the lower operation port 83b is A low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency Guide state) is set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is the same, but the high-frequency support mode In the support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 becomes open when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. In this case, in the case where the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 91 is opened multiple times, the closed state after one open state ends until the next open state starts. The time is set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory lottery and the next electric accessory lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. has been done.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a prize will be won in the lower operating port 83b is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 83a is higher than that of the lower operating port 83b, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operating port 83b is higher than that of the upper operating port 83a. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning occurs in the lower operating port 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while trying not to reduce the number of balls he has too much. be able to.

Note that the specific configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently in the electric utility release state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and includes, for example, electric utility release. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the lottery. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one condition or any combination of the number of times, opening time, and winning probability.

The winning type counter C2 is updated regularly, and the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404, and when a game ball enters the lower operating port 83b, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 404. is stored in

The distribution destinations of game results for the winning type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 422 serving as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be explained using the schematic diagram of FIG. 16. The distribution table includes a distribution table for the upper operating port (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16(a), and a distribution table for the lower operating port (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16(b). minute information group) is set.

In the distribution table for the upper operation opening, the game results are distributed to 8R certain variable jackpot results (special game results for high probability), 8R normal jackpot results (special game results for low probability), and 4R certain variable jackpot results (high probability special game results). A 4R normal jackpot result (a game result corresponding to a low probability) is set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper operating opening, among the values of the winning type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot result, and "9 to 14" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot result. ” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result, “15 to 23” corresponds to the 4R definite variable jackpot result, and “24 to 29” correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower operation opening, the game results are distributed to 16R certain variable jackpot results (special game results for high probability), 8R certain variable jackpot results (special game results for high probability), and 8R normal jackpot results (low probability). Special game results corresponding to probability), 4R probability variable jackpot results (game results corresponding to high probability), and 4R normal jackpot results (game results corresponding to low probability) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower operating opening, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and "6 to 11" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot result. ” corresponds to the 8R definite variable jackpot result, “12 to 17” corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot result, “18 to 23” corresponds to the 4R definite variable jackpot result, and “24 to 29” corresponds to the 4R definite variable jackpot result. It corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

The 16R probability variable jackpot result, 8R probability variable jackpot result, and 4R probability variable jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As shown in FIG. 16(c), this high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result is achieved, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. However, as shown in FIG. 16(c), this high-frequency support mode will result in a jackpot if the number of games played during the high-frequency support mode reaches the end standard number of games or before the end standard number of games is reached. (More specifically, when the open/close execution mode is started), it ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. As for the end reference number of times, one of five times, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times, will be set. Note that in this embodiment, the termination reference number of times is hidden and the end timing of the high-frequency support mode is hidden, thereby making it difficult to discern how long the high-frequency support mode continues. This is an idea to suppress the monotony of the game in the high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, as mentioned above, in some cases where the jackpot result is a variable probability jackpot, the same symbol combination as the normal jackpot result is displayed at the final stop (confirmed display) on the display screen 253a, and it is possible to identify whether the result is normal or variable. It is designed to be difficult. However, if the high frequency support mode continues more than 100 times, it becomes clear from the behavior of the electric accessory 91 that the high frequency support mode is in progress based on the probability variable jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404, and when a game ball enters the lower operating port 83b, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 404. is stored in Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 402 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually depending on the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-reach display (ready-to-reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the game results are displayed in a manner compatible with the opening/closing execution mode. In a gaming machine where a stop display result after a variable display can become a special display result in a game round that resulted in a game result, the stop display result is displayed after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 253. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result before being derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode can be established. This is a display state in which a certain reach symbol combination is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode can be established on a preset valid line on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a certain reach symbol combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, symbols are fluctuated and displayed by a final stop symbol sequence.

To explain in more detail the display contents on the display screen 253a, first, when the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row, and then after the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row, a symbol combination that hits any active line is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with numbers that make up , and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a reach display is performed by fluctuating symbols in the middle symbol row. becomes. When a jackpot occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with numbers that make up the winning symbol combination are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is changed. be terminated.

In addition, in the reach display, with the reach symbol combination displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character etc. is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. These include those that perform a ready-to-reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after reducing or not displaying a ready-to-win symbol combination. In addition, when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS calculates, in the MPU 402, the variation display time in the upper operating port display section and the lower operating port display section of the main display unit 87 (main display section D) and the variable display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253. Used in making decisions. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the upper operating port display section and the lower operating port display section and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 253.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is configured such that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to be in the open state.

As already explained, the MPU 402 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variable display time in the upper operating port display section and the lower operating port display section. A variable display time table storage area 423 is used. In addition, the MPU 402 determines the stop result in the upper operating port display section and the lower operating port display section using the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is used for this determination.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162 to advance the game will be explained. In addition to the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 402 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , description of these various processes will be omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 402 periodically (eg, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162, determines the states of the winning winning detection sensors, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S104, a winning process for a through prize is executed in conjunction with a winning to the through gate 84. In the winning process for through gates, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for through gates is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the power reserve area 433. On the condition that the stored accessory storage number is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area. If the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning processing for the through gate ends.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the actuating opening associated with winning to the actuating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

(Winning process for actuation port)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 and 19, the winning process for the actuation opening will be described.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (winning). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process advances to step S202, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. In the subsequent step S204, a value corresponding to the upper operation port 83a is read from the reservation number storage area, and this value is set as the start reservation storage number RaN stored in the reservation area Ra (hereinafter referred to as upper operation port reservation memory). (also called number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, etc., and the main prize winning processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process advances to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b (winning). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S207, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in external output processing S401 of the normal processing described later.

In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side with information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. In the subsequent step S209, a value corresponding to the lower operation port 83b is read from the reservation number storage area, and this value is set as the start reservation memory number RbN stored in the reservation area Rb (hereinafter referred to as the reservation memory for the lower operation port). (also called number RbN). Thereafter, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, etc., and the main prize winning processing is ended.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in both steps S201 and S206, that is, when there is no ball entering either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the main winning processing is immediately terminated.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be described with reference to FIG. 19.

(Information acquisition processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the operation pending memory number N stored in the pending number storage area of the pending ball storage area 432, specifically, the trigger for the information acquisition process among the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b. It is determined whether or not the operation pending memory number N (the above RaN or RbN) related to the ball entry portion is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If the operation reservation memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is directly terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the operation reservation memory number N of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S302. In step S303, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S304, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the above step S103 is transferred to the empty storage area of the holding area RE for the operating opening. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common reservation number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In other words, when the start pending storage number RaN for the upper operating port is set, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103. is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the upper operating port holding area Ra, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the upper operating port start pending storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In addition, when the start pending storage number RbN for the lower operating port is set, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is used for the lower operating port. The storage area Rb is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the storage area Rb, that is, the storage area Rb corresponding to the starting storage number RbN for the lower operating opening incremented by 1 in step S302.

After storing the hold information, the process advances to step S305. In step S305, a display update process is executed for the pending number display section of the main display unit 87. In the display update process, if the current ball landing destination (winning destination) is the upper operating hole 83a, the display of the reserved number display section for the upper operating hole is updated, and the current ball landing destination (winning destination) is the lower operating hole 83a. In the case of the port 83b, the display on the reservation number display section for the lower operating port is updated.

Each reservation number display section is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in the reservation number display section, the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 83a, and the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 83b are determined. It has a matching configuration. If the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 83a increases due to winning this time, the number of LEDs lit in the reservation number display section for the upper operation port will be increased accordingly, and the number of LEDs lit up in the reservation number display section for the upper operation port will be increased accordingly. When the number of reservations concerned increases, processing is performed to increase the number of LEDs lit on the reservation number display section for the lower operation port accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification/presentation control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are sub-side (secondary) control devices, are made to recognize that a winning has occurred in the actuating ports 83a and 83b, and the system is suspended as described later. A confirmation process for a pending notice and a setting process for a pending command, which are processes for executing a notice, are executed, and this information acquisition process is ended. Note that the hold command includes information as to which of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b the winning is based on.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process of step S307 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later.

(normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing in steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as production commands such as a variation start command, type command, and variation end command, a hold command, and a shift command to be described later are set, they are transmitted to the notification/production control device 140. .

Further, details will be described later, but for example, every time the fluctuating display of the symbol is completed on the actuating opening display sections UD and LD of the main display section D, an external signal indicating symbol confirmation is output to the hall computer HC, and the opening/closing is executed. During the mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect is output to the hall computer HC, and when in the high-frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect is output to the hall computer HC. do.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the subsequent step S403, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, etc. are performed.

After executing the game time control process in step S403, the process advances to step S404, and a game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, this gaming state transition process causes the gaming state to shift to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The details of the gaming cycle control process in step S403 and the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release is determined whether or not the electric role object 91 is to be in an open state using the numerical information acquired from the electric role model release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 433 of the RAM 404. A lottery is held, and when the electric accessory open state is won, opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 91 is executed. It also controls the display of the through-gate display section in the main display section D so as to teach the lottery results of the electric winning lottery.

As already explained, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes low-frequency support mode.

In the electric support support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 will be in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than in the case of the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time to be longer. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, if the electric role opening state is won and the electric role opening state occurs multiple times, the next opening state will start after one opening state ends. The closing time is set to be shorter than the opening time.

Incidentally, when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is activated once every predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source/launch control device 243. Excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404. Furthermore, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404.

Since the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

(Game time control processing)
Next, the game time control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 24.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the main game round is continued without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 and the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509. Control processing ends.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S502 whether or not a game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the operating port display sections UD and LD of the main display unit 87 are in a variable display or a fixed display. If the game is not in progress, the process advances to steps S503 to S505 for starting the game. In the process for starting a game round, first, in step S503, it is determined whether the total number of starting reservation balls (common reservation number CRN) is "0" or not. When the common reservation number CRN is “0”, it means that no reservation information is stored in the reservation ball storage area 432. Therefore, the main game round control process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 432 for variable display, Further, in step S505, after executing a fluctuation start process for starting the variable display of the operating port display section in the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the symbol display device 253, the present game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be explained in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22.

(Data setting processing)
In the data setting process, first in step S601, among the active pending storage numbers N stored in the pending number storage area, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common pending number CRN are decremented by one. Then, it is determined whether the number of pending information stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb (see FIG. 14), that is, the number of operating pending memories N (lower operating port holding memory number RbN) is "0". do. If the number of reserved memories RbN for the lower operating port is "0", the data setting process related to the display section UD for the upper operating port is executed, and if the number of reserved memories RbN for the lower operating port is not "0", the data setting process for the lower operating port display section UD is executed. Data setting processing related to the actuating port display section LD is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common reservation number is 1 or more, as already explained. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the lower operating port retention memory number RbN is "0". If the information is stored, the number of pending information stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra (see FIG. 14), that is, the number of operating pending memories N (upper operating port holding memory number RaN) is Regardless of whether the number is 1 or more, the data stored in the lower operation port holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display. That is, in step S602, if the reservation information is stored in both the upper operation port reservation area Ra and the lower operation port reservation area Rb, priority is given to the reservation information corresponding to the lower operation port 83b. becomes.

In the following step S603, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of one of the upper operation opening retention area Ra and the lower operation opening retention area Rb, in which the data moved to the execution area AE was stored, is are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. As a result, for example, as data in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, the data in each area is changed from the second area to the first area, from the third area to the second area, from the fourth area to the third area, and so on. Data is shifted.

In the subsequent step S604, a shift command is set which is information for making the notification/effect control device 140 recognize that the data in the reservation areas Ra and Rb has been shifted. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). This shift command is then transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification/effect control device 140.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

In the variation start process, first in step S701, a validity determination process is executed to determine whether the pending information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for jackpot determination, that is, information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. When the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the obtained information is changed to the information corresponding to the jackpot by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the information grasped above is determined to be a jackpot. Identify whether the information is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, type determination processing is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the winning type counter C2 is grasped. Further, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, it is specified whether the information for type determination grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability-variable jackpot result. Specifically, if the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower operating port 83b. If so, the type is determined with reference to the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b.

In the subsequent step S704, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot result (16R probability variable jackpot result, 8R probability variable jackpot result, 4R probability variable jackpot result) based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. judge. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that it is not a jackpot win, then in step S707, a stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed.

In addition, the probability variable jackpot results are roughly divided into 16R probability variation jackpot results, 8R probability variation jackpot results, and 4R probability variation jackpot results. In the process of step S705, in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result is performed, and in the case of an 8R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot result is performed. In the case of a 4R probability variable jackpot result, a process for setting a stop result corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is performed. Further, the normal jackpot results are broadly divided into 8R normal jackpot results and 4R normal jackpot results. In the process of step S706, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed. conduct.

In each stop result setting process from step S705 to step S707, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is referred to for information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. The specified information is stored in the RAM 404. Further, in steps S705 and S706, information for the MPU 402 to specify that the success/failure determination result of the current game round is a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S705, one of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and 4R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, either the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S705 to S707, in step S708, a variable display time setting process is executed.

(Fluctuating display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24(a), first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 4R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. .

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a losing result, the process advances to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not a reach display will occur on the symbol display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of the reach display. When specifying the presence or absence of a reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process advances to step S803, and the current variable display time table for reach generation stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referred to. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and in the subsequent step S804, the fluctuation display time information is transferred to the fluctuation display time counter area (fluctuation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. ) to the variable display time counter. After that, this setting process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery is a big hit, or when the result of the lottery is a loss and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display (specifically, normal reach AB) and a super reach display (specifically, super reach AC). In the variable display time table for reach occurrence, variable display time information corresponding to normal reach display and super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. be obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, there is a table in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS, and by referring to this table, the value of the current variation type counter CS can be determined. A corresponding reach display is determined.

In addition, more specifically, the variable display time table for reaching occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, a variable display time is set so that a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in the case of a variable jackpot result, and a non-specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in the case of a normal jackpot result. A variable display time is set.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S802, in step S805, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined by referring to the variation display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variation display time table storage area 423. The variable display time corresponding to is acquired, and in step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time when reach does not occur is set to become shorter as the number of stored hold information (common hold count CRN) increases. Specifically, in the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence that is referred to during the low frequency support mode, when the number of stored hold information (number of hold) is "4", it is 1 sec, and "3". In the case of "2", it is 3 seconds, in the case of "2", it is 5 seconds or 7 seconds, in the case of "1", it is 11 seconds or 13 seconds, and in the case of "0", it is defined as 15 seconds or 17 seconds (Figure 24 ( b)). On the other hand, in the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence that is referenced during the high-frequency support mode, when the number of stored hold information (number of hold) is "2" to "4", the display time is 1 sec. or 5 seconds, 2 seconds or 5 seconds in the case of "1", and 5 seconds or 8 seconds in the case of "0" (see FIG. 24(c)).

In the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of balls entering the lower operating port 83b increases due to the support by the electric accessory 91, and as long as the game ball is launched to the right route, the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 83b increases. will generally fluctuate between "2" and "4". On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the hold information related to the upper operating port 83a is the main one, and the number of hold information changes approximately from "0" to "3". Thereby, the game progress in the high-frequency support mode is differentiated so that it is faster than the game progress in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the low-frequency support mode, the final display time of a pattern is set to 2 seconds, while in the high-frequency support mode, the final display time of the pattern is set to 1 second, and the final display time also varies. It has been shortened. As a result, further speeding up of game progress is realized.

When comparing the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence compatible with low-frequency support mode and the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence compatible with high-frequency support mode, the variable display time in high-frequency support mode is overall better. It is set to be shorter than . In addition, when the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is referred to, no matter what the number of reservations is, 5 seconds is displayed at a predetermined rate (5% in this embodiment). is set. This is a device to prevent the game progress from becoming excessively fast or monotonous in the high-frequency support mode, and by utilizing this variable display time, the symbol display device 253 displays a branching effect (not compatible with reach display development), which will be described later. will be executed.

Incidentally, the configuration related to setting the variable display time is not limited to the above. For example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of common reservation numbers CRN, and the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common reservation numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter variable display time is selected than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, even when the number of pending information is the same. Although a variable display time table for generation is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and the variable display time that is likely to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different depending on when a jackpot is won and when it is a miss. It may also be a configuration. Further, a variable display time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a missed reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may be set individually.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23), after the fluctuation display time setting processing is executed in step S708, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S709. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Further, the type command includes information on game results. In other words, the type command includes information on game results such as 16R probability variable jackpot result information, 8R probability variation jackpot result information, 4R probability variation jackpot result information, 8R normal jackpot result information, 4R normal jackpot result information, and losing result. Contains information such as.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 for the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and determines the content of the determined performance. The lamp section 26 and the speaker section 29 are controlled so that the following is executed. In addition, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance such as the fluctuation display pattern of symbols on the symbol display device 253 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and The information is added to the variation start command and type command and transmitted to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 displays the symbol display device 253 so that the game performance (display performance) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/performance control device 140 based on the received variation start command and type command. Control.

After that, in step S710, the main display unit 87 starts displaying a variable pattern on the corresponding one of the upper operating port display section UD and the lower operating opening display section LD, and then ends this variation start process. . Note that it is also possible to configure the variable display of symbols and the like to start before the lottery is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 21), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display mode, the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game progress processing, first in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) provided in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 404 has become "0". As described above, this value is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24). Further, this set value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode in the corresponding one of the upper operating port display section UD and the lower operating port display section LD of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the main game round control process is ended.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S508. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 404 in any one of steps S705 to S707 is specified, and a pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the upper operating port display section UD and the lower operating port display section LD. The corresponding operating port display unit is controlled so that a stop display (confirmation display) is displayed on the corresponding one of them.

In the following step S509, a variation end command is set. After that, the main game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/effect control device 140 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining its information format. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 410 causes the final stop symbol combination in the game round to be displayed as determined (final stop display).

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

In the gaming state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S902, and it is determined whether it is the timing at which one game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether a preset stop display time (determined display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended on either of the actuating port display parts UD and LD of the main display part D. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, where it is determined whether the game result of the current game round (the result of the above-mentioned win/fail lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag, 4R probability variable jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. do. If none of the above-mentioned flags are stored, the main game state transition process is ended as is.

If any of the above-mentioned flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed in step S904. Through the start process, the restriction on the operation of the variable winning device 82 by the lock device is released, and the opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is permitted until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, in the start process of step S904, an opening/closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and output of an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect to the hall computer HC of the gaming hall is started. In step S901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in effect based on the presence or absence of this opening/closing execution mode flag.

In the following step S905, the open number counter OC provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to "4", "8", or "16". Specifically, when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, "16" is set in the open number counter OC, and the 8R probability variable jackpot flag or When the 8R normal jackpot flag is stored, the open number counter OC is set to "8", and when the 4R probability variable jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, it is opened. Set "4" to the number counter OC. The opening number counter OC functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable prize winning device 82 has been opened. After executing the process in step S905, the process advances to step S506, and an opening command is set.

This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the production is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode on the symbol display device 253, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/effect control device 140, the display control device 410 displays a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, as a display content corresponding to a jackpot. The display control of the symbol display device 253 is executed so that moving images of characters, etc. are displayed, background images, etc. are switched. After executing the process of step S906, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process advances to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S908.

In the grand prize opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the grand prize opening of the variable winning device 82 is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning drive section of the variable winning prize device 82. If the big prize opening is not open, it is determined whether the value of the open number counter OC is "0" or not. If the value of the opening number counter OC is "0", the main prize opening opening/closing process is immediately terminated.

If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". The open timer counter TC is a counter that is referenced when grasping the open period and closed period (interval period) of the big prize opening, and its value is set to "1" every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is executed. It is subtracted by one by one. If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended.

When the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0", the process of opening the big winning opening is executed. Specifically, the variable winning a prize driving section is brought into a driving state in order to open the big winning a prize opening. Thereafter, a closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (big winning opening) is performed. Specifically, the open timer counter TC is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30 seconds), and the winning counter PC is set to "10". After executing this setting process, an open command indicating that the variable winning device 82 (big winning hole) has been opened is set, and the main winning hole opening/closing process is ended. This set release command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the release based on receiving the release command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the production is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big winning hole of the variable winning device 82 is being opened, it is determined whether the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0" or not. If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the big winning hole based on the detection signal from the ball entering detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable winning device 82. If no prize has been won, the main prize opening/closing process is immediately ended.

If a winning has occurred, output processing of the winning command is executed. The winning command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification/performance control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a preset number of game balls based on receiving the winning command. In the notification/performance control device 140, when a winning command is issued during the opening/closing execution mode, a process for changing the performance during the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, is executed to notify the winning. conduct.

After executing the command output process, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and then it is determined whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main winning hole is directly opened. Finish the opening/closing process. When the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", it means that the big winning opening closing condition is satisfied. In this case, the variable winning a prize driving section is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning a prize opening.

Subsequently, update processing of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, if the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1. The value of is maintained at "0". Thereafter, it is determined whether the updated value of the open number counter OC is "0".

If it is determined that the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0", set the opening timer counter TC to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 seconds), set the closing command, and then perform the main prize opening opening/closing process. end. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives a closing command, it determines the content of the production corresponding to the closure command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the production is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the open number counter is "0", ending start processing is executed. In the start processing, an ending standby time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 403, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After that, after setting the ending command, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S908, it is determined in step S909 whether the value of the open number counter OC is "0", and the process proceeds to step S909. In S910, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" or if the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the open number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S911, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, or the 4R probability variation jackpot result. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a 16R probability variable jackpot flag, an 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and a 4R probability variation jackpot flag are stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

When the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a 16R probability variable jackpot result, an 8R probability variable jackpot result, or a 4R probability variable jackpot result, the flag related to the transition of the game state is erased. After executing the erasing process, a game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the winning/losing table for the high probability mode will be referred to in the winning/losing lottery in subsequent game rounds.

Thereafter, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent power support processing, and the fluctuation display time of the symbols at the support lottery is This is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 seconds), and furthermore, the period in which the open state is maintained by one opening is extended (specifically set to 5.0 seconds).

On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, that is, the 8R normal jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If so, erase the flag related to the transition of the gaming state. After executing the erasing process, a game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, the success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent power support processing, and the fluctuation display time of the symbols at the support lottery is This is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 seconds), and furthermore, the period in which the open state is maintained by one opening is extended (specifically set to 5.0 seconds).

Unlike the above-mentioned case of variable probability jackpot results, an upper limit is set on the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. Specifically, the game number counter stored in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set to one of "10," "20," "30," "50," and "100." Regarding the 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result, 1/10 corresponds to the number of support "10", 1/10 corresponds to the number of support "20", and 1/10 corresponds to the number of support "20". 30'', 2/10 corresponds to a support count of ``50'', and 5/10 corresponds to a support count of ``100''. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until the number of games played reaches the upper limit, and when the set upper limit is reached, the support mode switches from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Become. In the following description, this upper limit is also referred to as the termination reference number of times.

After the gaming state setting processing is performed, the opening/closing execution mode ending processing is executed in step S912, and then the main gaming state transition processing is ended. In this termination process, the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 26, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410.

An MPU 442 is mounted on a notification/performance control board 441 provided in the notification/performance control device 140. The MPU 442 includes a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 442, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443. A certain RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are built-in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and RAM 444 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 442, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game time control commands (game time control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. . It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, as well as opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already described, the output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp sections 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the speaker section 29, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information format.

The display control device 410 includes a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. It is equipped with Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 472, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/presentation control device 140, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically, generates an internal command for the VDP 475). Specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process of specifying the variable display pattern of each game round on the symbol display device 253 based on the command sent from the notification/performance control device 140, and performs drawing on the VDP 475 in accordance with the processing result. Execute processing. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

The VDP 475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 253. Since the VDP 475 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472, the video RAM 477, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 253.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing various image data such as symbols, character images, and background images displayed on the symbol display device 253. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476. Further, it is also possible to configure the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 to be stored in the character ROM 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 253, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 477, the display contents of the symbol display device 253 are changed.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a is determined by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and the display is performed based on the result. The details of the performance are determined by the display control device 410. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a fluctuating display control process as part of a regular process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and this fluctuating display control process controls the fluctuating display of symbols. The outline of the aspect etc. is determined. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether symbol display for one game (variable display, temporary stop display, or final stop display) is being executed on the symbol display device 253. Determine whether or not there is. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the present variable display control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the fluctuation start process is executed in step S1003, and then the present fluctuation display control process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the fluctuating display control process is ended after executing the fluctuating process in step S1005. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various performances, changing the determined performance, etc. in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process advances to step S1006, and after executing the process for ending the variation in step S1006, the present variation display control process is ended. In the variation termination process, the variation display of symbols and the performance being executed are terminated in a manner corresponding to the pending information related to the game round (final stop display or final display). In this process, the speaker section 29 and the lamp section 26 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, this variation termination process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 253 to confirm and stop the symbols based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, supplementary explanation will be given of the fluctuation start processing in step S1003. The fluctuation start process is a process for starting the performance of the game round based on receiving the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162.

In the variation start process, first, in step S1101, the variation start command received this time is read out, and information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main control device 162 transmits the variation start command, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read, and from the command, information on game results such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or miss result information is specified. Then, in step S1101, from the information specified above, information on whether there is a jackpot win, information on the type of jackpot when it is a jackpot win, information on whether reach occurs when the jackpot is not won, and variable display time. This information is stored in the register of the MPU 442.

After executing the process in step S1101, the process advances to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the game is in a normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the process advances to step S1103. In step S1103, special effect mode processing is executed. In this embodiment, a normal performance mode and a special performance mode are provided as performance modes in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The special production mode will shift when the number of games executed in the normal production mode reaches a preset number (specified number of times), and will return to the normal production mode when a predetermined ending condition is met. This is a composed production mode. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the time-saving performance mode is set as the performance mode in the normal game state that supports the high-frequency support mode, and the performance performed in the time-saving performance mode is diverted in the special performance mode. The configuration is as follows. Here, the special effect mode processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

(Processing for special production mode)
In the special effect mode processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process advances to step S1202. In step S1202, a game count counter for the special performance mode provided in the game count counter area 462 of the RAM 444 is updated. The game count counter for the special performance mode is a counter for specifying the number of games played in the normal performance mode.

After executing the update process in step S1202, the process advances to step S1203. In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal performance mode has reached a preset number (specified number of times) by referring to the value of the number of games counter for the special performance mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1203, the process for this special effect mode is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process advances to step S1204.

In step S1204, a transition process to a special effect mode is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to switch the light emitting body mode of the lamp section 26 to one compatible with the special performance mode, and processing is also performed to switch the BGM output from the speaker section 29 to one compatible with the special performance mode. Then, a special performance mode start command is output to the display control device 410 in order to switch the background display mode and the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 to a mode corresponding to the special performance mode. Thereafter, in step S1205, a special effect mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the process for this special effect mode is ended. By setting the special effect mode flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 thereafter.

Returning to the explanation of step S1201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the process advances to step S1206. In step S1206, a pseudo variation counter provided in the RAM 444 is referred to, and the number of times a pseudo variation (unit performance) described later has been executed is determined to be the lower limit of the end reference number of times that can be set in the high frequency support mode (in this implementation). 10 times in the form) is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the process for this special effect mode is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the process advances to step S1207. In step S1207, a continuation lottery process in the special effect mode is executed. That is, when the number of unit performances performed in the special performance mode reaches the above-mentioned lower limit, it is determined by lottery whether or not the special performance mode can be continued.

If the lottery process in step S1207 yields a continuation result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208, and the process for this special effect mode is immediately ended. If the lottery process in step S1207 results in non-continuation, a negative determination is made in step S1208, and the process advances to step S1209. In step S1209, a special effect mode end flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. When this special performance mode end flag is set, processing is performed to switch the performance mode from the special performance mode to the normal performance mode at the end of the current game round.

Thereafter, in step S1210, the process for resetting the prescribed number of times is executed, and then the process for this special effect mode is ended. A plurality of candidates are provided for the specified number of times, and in the resetting process, one of these candidates is selected by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the span from the end of the special performance mode to the transition to the next special performance mode.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start process in FIG. 28 again, after executing the special effect mode process in step S1103, the process advances to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether a special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the process advances to step S1105. In step S1105, a production determination process for the normal production mode is executed based on the information grasped in step S1101.

Specifically, when the game result of the game round to be started this time is a game result corresponding to a jackpot result (that is, a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result), a performance setting process for jackpot is executed. In the performance setting process for the jackpot, the final stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (the final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, in the case of a variable jackpot result, the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) or non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on one active line L1 to L5 is performed. The stop result in which the combination of the main symbols) is displayed as the final stop is determined as the stop result for this game round. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) is displayed on one active line L1 to L5 in the final stop is displayed in this game round. Determined as the final stop result.

The type of main symbol and active lines L1 to L5 that are finally displayed in the event of a jackpot are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 stores each valid line L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above process is the final stop line set in the RAM 444. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, processing is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. In addition, in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined in various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 444.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a jackpot result, the result is notified through a reach display, etc. In the process of determining the variable display mode for displaying the reach, the variable display pattern table for displaying the reach stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time are determined. A performance pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. It also executes a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444. In addition, also in the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

When the game result is not a jackpot result and is a game result in which a reach is generated, a performance setting process for the occurrence of a reach (missing reach) corresponding to a losing result is executed. In this performance setting process, the outline of the performance and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Regarding the former, the explanation will be referred to since it is the same as the processing in the case of a jackpot result. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, the final stopped symbols are determined so as not to result in a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. That is, the final stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of out-of-reach symbol combinations and active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, ensure that the same combination of symbols does not occur on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 that are the same as the symbols forming the reach line are placed on the reach line. The stopping result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at a stopping position shifted forward or backward. Thereafter, a process is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If it is neither a jackpot result nor a winning result corresponding to the ready-to-reach display, that is, if it is a complete winning result, the outline of the effect for a complete winning and the final stop symbol combination, etc. are determined. Since this process deals with a complete loss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing the determination process in step S1105, the process advances to step S1108, and a process is executed to output commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on these various commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 in order to execute the performance in the current game round.

After executing the process in step S1108, in the subsequent step S1109, a process to start the performance for the game round is executed, and then the main variation start process is ended. Specifically, drive control of the speaker section 29 and lamp section 26 is started based on the performance pattern determined in step S1105, and the performance for the game round is started.

Here, based on FIG. 29, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display mode of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) in the normal performance mode. FIG. 30(a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 30(b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. Note that in FIG. 30(b), for convenience of explanation, the background image, pending information, etc. displayed on the display screen 253a are omitted.

(Fluctuating display mode in normal production mode)
As shown in FIG. 30(a), the variation display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is roughly divided into five types: complete miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Separated. Each of these variable display modes is set to have a different variable display time, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible.

Specifically, the variable display time for a complete miss is "1 sec to 17 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of reservations), the variable display time for normal reach A is "18 sec", and the variable display time for normal reach B is For the variable display time of Normal Reach A, it is "20 seconds or 22 seconds" which is longer than the variable display time of Normal Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach A is "22 seconds or 24 seconds" which is the same as or longer than the variable display time of Normal Reach B, and the variable display time of Super Reach B is The display time is 24 seconds or 26 seconds, which is the same as or longer than the variable display time of Super Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is 26 seconds or 28 seconds, which is longer than the variable display time of Super Reach B. It becomes. For example, when the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "22 seconds", the notification/effect control device 140 understands that normal reach B or super reach A should be executed. , which reach display will be selected.

In addition, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, Super Reach C > Super Reach B
＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Normal Reach A is more likely to be selected in this order, and in the game round that corresponds to a losing result, it is a complete loss ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Super Reach B ＞
The configuration is such that it is likely to be selected in the order of Super Reach C. In other words, the setting is such that the longer the variable display time becomes, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot becomes.

Here, the variation display mode of normal reaches A and B will be explained with reference to FIG. 30(b1). When Normal Reach A or B is selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is ended (stopped). Then, the variable display of the symbols is ended (stopped) in the lower symbol row Z3. In this state that the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same number attached to any of the valid lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13(a)) are stopped and displayed. A leech line is formed. Then, under the situation where the reach line is formed, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner, resulting in a reach display (reach variation display). After reaching the ready-to-reach display, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, thereby ending the variable display. Then, you will be notified that you have won the jackpot when the same symbols that make up the reach display stop on the reach line, and you will be notified that you have won the jackpot when other symbols stop on the same reach line. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined fixed display time (final stop time). In other words, the current game round continues until the final display time has elapsed, and when the final display time has elapsed, the transition to the next game round is permitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, by setting a difference in the variable display time of the medium symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured. , how to set the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the above-mentioned difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display until the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of super reaches A, B, and C will be explained based on the variable display mode of normal reaches A, B mentioned above. As shown in FIGS. 30(b2) to (b4), for super reaches A, B, and C, the above-mentioned reach lines are formed through the same process as for normal reaches A, B. After the ready-to-reach line is formed, a ready-to-reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in conjunction with the fluctuating display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of medium symbol row Z2 (center of variable display area ME), and in super reach B, a character imitating a fairy is displayed. In Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of medium symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl will be displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Pseudo continuous fluctuation display)
In the normal performance mode of this embodiment, a suggestive performance that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of transitioning to the reach display is provided in both game times that correspond to the reach display and game times that do not correspond to the reach display. May be executed. The flow of the suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 31(b) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestion effect is executed. Note that in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), illustrations of the background image, pending information, etc. displayed on the display screen 253a are also omitted, similar to FIG. 30(b).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), at the start timing of the game round, the variable display of each symbol row that had been stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the fluctuating display started, the speed of fluctuating the symbol display decreases, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row. If the current game round does not correspond to the above-mentioned suggested performance, the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is finally displayed on the active line, and the game result is clearly shown to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 31(a), since the game result is a complete loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete loss is displayed as the final stop on the active line.

FIG. 31(b) shows an example of a game round corresponding to the suggestion effect and the reach display. At the start timing of a game round, the variable display of each symbol row that had been stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a is started. After that, the variable display speed of the symbols decreases, and each symbol column is stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol column → lower symbol column → middle symbol column. When the lower symbol row stops, the symbols in the upper symbol row should not form a reach line with the symbols in the upper symbol row. In other words, the symbols in the lower symbol row that can form a reach line with the upper symbols that are stopped are shifted from the upper symbol. The machine will stop at the specified position. After that, when the middle symbol row stops and all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display, temporary stop display), the symbol combination corresponding to the above suggestion (re-fluctuation symbol combination, or , temporary stop symbol combination) is formed.

Thereafter, all the symbol rows that have been temporarily stopped resume their fluctuations with effects such as specific sound effects and flashes. In other words, it appears as if one game round has ended, but in reality the game round is continuing, and the temporary stop → re-variation is performed. In other words, before the final stop display, displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-variation from the temporary stop display to the re-variation display is the suggestive performance in this embodiment, and in the following explanation, this display will be referred to as "pseudo continuous fluctuation display". ” is also called.

The pseudo-continuous variation display may be continuously (repeatedly) executed multiple times during one game. In addition, during the pseudo-continuous variation display, even if all the symbol rows are stopped, the symbol fluctuation display continues on the operating opening display parts UD and LD of the main display unit 87 that correspond to the current game round. be done.

After the fluctuating display resumes, the timing of the final stop display (confirmed display) is reached, so the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is stopped and displayed on the active line (final stop display), and the game result is displayed to the player. shall be clearly stated. In the example shown in FIG. 31(b), since the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (final stop display) on the active line.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display in this embodiment occurs not only in the game round corresponding to the reach display, but also in the game round corresponding to the complete miss result. By leaving room for a jackpot even if the symbol combination does not shift to the reach display or the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop, the attention to the stopped symbol combination is reduced to the lower and middle symbol rows. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of a sudden drop when the temperature is lowered.

Regarding the table that determines whether or not to display pseudo-continuous fluctuations, pseudo-continuous fluctuations display is more likely to occur in game rounds that correspond to jackpot results than in game rounds that correspond to out-of-reach results and game times that correspond to completely out-of-reach results. Moreover, it is configured so that pseudo continuous fluctuation display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to an out-of-reach result than in a game round corresponding to a completely out-of-reach result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, a supplementary explanation will be given of the flow when the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is repeated during one game round. FIG. 32(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between effects and jackpot expectation. In addition, in FIG. 32(a), in order to facilitate comparison, ta1 to ta2 are examples of game times that do not support pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and ta3 to ta9 are game times that are compatible with pseudo continuous fluctuation display. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), at timing ta1 when a game round that does not support pseudo-continuous variable display starts, variable display of symbols starts on the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and accordingly Variable display of symbols has started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At timing ta2, when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed since the start of variable display of symbols and symbols, the symbols that were being varied and displayed on the actuating opening display section become symbols that correspond to the current game result. The symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen 253a are then stopped and displayed in such a way that they become a symbol combination that corresponds to the current game result. In other words, the start/end timing of the fluctuation is synchronized (matched) between the operating port display section and the display screen 253a.

At timing ta3, when a game round compatible with pseudo-continuous variable display starts, variable display of symbols starts on the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and in accordance with this, symbols are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The fluctuation display of has started. After the variable display is started at the timing ta3, at the timing ta4 after a predetermined period has elapsed, a re-variable symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a.

At timing ta5, when the temporary stop time has elapsed from timing ta4, the variable display of each temporarily stopped symbol row is restarted. At this time, by adding a white effect along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a, it is suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to the reach display. During this time, the variable display of the pattern continues on the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and the variable display of the pattern on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the pattern on the operating port display section become asynchronous.

At timing ta6 when a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuating display was restarted, the re-fluctuation symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed again on the active line of the display screen 253a. At timing ta7, when the temporary stop time has elapsed from timing ta6, the variable display of each temporarily stopped symbol row is restarted. At this time, the color of the white effect currently displayed on the display screen 253a is changed from white to blue. Although the details will be described later, by repeating the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display (the effect color changing (stepping up)), it is suggested that the possibility of shifting to the reach display has increased. Note that during this time, the variable display of the pattern continues on the operating port display section, and the variable display of the pattern on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the pattern on the operating port display section become asynchronous.

At the timing of ta8 after the timing of ta7 when the fluctuating display of symbols is restarted, that is, at the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display, the upper and lower symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and only the middle symbol row continues to be fluctuated. state. In the example shown in FIG. 32(a), the current game result corresponds to a losing result. For this reason, after shifting to the reach display, specifically at the timing ta9 when the variable display time has elapsed from the timing ta3, the symbol corresponding to the miss result is stopped and displayed on the actuating opening display section, and the display screen 253a displays the picture corresponding to the miss result. The symbol combination corresponding to the result is displayed at the final stop. Thereafter, at the timing of ta10 when the final display time has elapsed, the game moves to the next game round.

In the above example, the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is repeated twice during one game round, but the number of times the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is repeated during one game round is within a certain range (in this embodiment, (1 to 6 times) is set. Regarding the table that determines the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuation displays, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuation displays set in the game round corresponding to a jackpot result compared to the game round corresponding to an out-of-reach result and the game round corresponding to a completely out-of-reach result. The configuration is such that the number of times the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is likely to be increased in a game session corresponding to an out-of-reach result compared to a game session corresponding to a completely out-of-reach result. . The greater the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so it is assumed that a player who expects a jackpot will expect many pseudo continuous fluctuation displays to continue. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of consecutive pseudo continuous fluctuation displays is shown with the fluctuation display executed after the first temporary stop being the first time.

In this embodiment, the color of the effect on the display screen 253a changes each time the pseudo continuous variation display continues, suggesting the degree of expectation for transition to the ready-to-reach display. Even if the player misses a part of the pseudo-continuous display, it is possible to check the level of expectation for transition to the ready-to-reach display based on the color of the effect.

As shown in Figure 32(b), the effect displayed during the pseudo-continuous display changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow as the number of consecutive pseudo-continuous fluctuation displays increases. It is set so that the expectation level of moving to the reach display in the order of white < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow, in other words, the expectation level of a jackpot result increases. Of these colors, transition to super reach is confirmed for green to rainbow (4 to 6 consecutive times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display), and a special jackpot is confirmed for rainbow (6 consecutive times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display) do.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects that a pseudo-continuous display will occur during a game round, and that if a pseudo-continuous variable display occurs, it will continue. By diversifying the effects other than the reach display in the game round executed in the normal effect mode, attention to the game is increased.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 28, if a negative determination is made in step S1102 of the fluctuation start process, that is, if the normal gaming state is compatible with the high-frequency support mode, the process advances to step S1107. In step S1107, performance determination processing for the high-frequency support mode is executed. After executing the effect determination process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108, where a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the determined content, and after executing the game round effect start process in step S1109, the main change Finish the start process.

In the effect determination process of step S1107, if the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (that is, a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result), a jackpot effect setting process is executed. In the performance setting process for the jackpot, the final stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (the final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, if the result is a variable jackpot, the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) or non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on the active line is The final stop result displayed is determined as the stop result of the main game round. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on the active line is displayed at the final stop is determined as the stop result for this game round. .

In addition, in the performance setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a jackpot result, the result is notified through a reach display, etc. In the process of determining the variable display mode for displaying the reach, the variable display pattern table for displaying the reach stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 is acquired, and the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time are determined. Determine a reach display performance pattern corresponding to the result. It also executes a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

If the game result corresponds to a losing reach, a performance setting process for generating a reach corresponding to a losing result is executed. In this performance setting process, the outline of the performance and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Regarding the former, the explanation will be referred to since it is the same as the processing in the case of a jackpot result. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on the active line is determined as the current stop result. In addition, in this determination, the stopping result on the effective line is determined so that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, which are the same as the symbols forming the reach line, are finally stopped at a stop position shifted before or after the reach line. Thereafter, a process is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If it is neither a jackpot result nor a winning result corresponding to the ready-to-reach display, that is, if it is a complete winning result, the outline of the effect for a complete winning and the final stop symbol combination, etc. are determined. Since this process deals with a complete loss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

As already explained, during the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls fired to the right route will be guided to the lower operating port 83b by the electric accessory 91. In the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time in a game round corresponding to a completely missed result is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode (see FIGS. 24(b) and 24(c)). In this way, by changing the progress speed of the game, the variety of the game is enhanced.

During the above-described normal performance mode, almost the entire area of the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is set as the symbol variable display area ME. On the other hand, during the production mode (time-saving production mode) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 33(a), the upper right area (reduced display area SE), the symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner/stopped in the upper right area. A girl character CP1 is displayed in the area (center part of the display screen 253a) made available by reducing the symbols and performs a predetermined action (movement) in accordance with the progress of the game. In this way, by greatly changing the display mode from the low-frequency support mode, the normal performance mode in the low-frequency support mode and the time-saving performance mode in the high-frequency support mode are differentiated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33(b) and 34, the flow of performance in the high-frequency support mode will be described. FIG. 33(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display effects. In addition, in FIG. 33(b), a case is illustrated in which a game round corresponding to a losing result is started at each timing of tb1, tb3, tb5, and tb7.

In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), at timing tb1 during the high-frequency support mode, the variable display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reduced display area SE of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) is started. There is. The girl character CP1 displayed in the lower right portion (initial position) of the display screen 253a starts to move across the display screen 253a from the right side to the left side in accordance with the start of the variable display of symbols ( (See FIG. 34(a1)). In this embodiment, after the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character CP2, the transition is made to the ready-to-reach display, but while the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the girl character CP1 is searching for the fairy character CP2. A moving image is displayed.

At the timing tb2, the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the reduced display area SE. The character CP1 returns to the initial position (lower right portion of the display screen 253a) between the timing tb2 and the timing tb3 when the final display time has elapsed.

A series of actions of the character CP1 displayed between timings tb1 and tb2 are stored in the character ROM 476 of the display control device 410 as performance data. Regarding the timing of tb3 to tb4 and the timing of tb5 to tb6, both are game times that can completely miss, and using the above performance data, the same performance (search performance) as the timing of tb1 to tb2 is repeated. That will happen.

At the timing tb7 after the timing tb6, a game round corresponding to the missed reach is started. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, variable display of symbols in the reduced display area SE and animation display of characters in the variable display area ME are started at timing tb6. At the timing of tb8, when a predetermined time (for example, the same time as the variable display time shown in the timings of tb1 and tb2) has elapsed from the timing of tb7, a branching effect (capture) indicating that there is a possibility of transitioning to the reach display is displayed. performance) will begin.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen, and in the branching effect, a chase between the girl character CP1 and the fairy character CP2 is shown on the display screen 253a. It will be displayed. Depending on whether or not the girl character CP1 was able to catch the fairy character CP2 after the chase, it is clearly indicated whether or not to move to the reach display. In game rounds that support the reach display, a branching effect shows the girl character CP1 catching the fairy character CP2 (success display), and in game times that do not support the reach display, a branching effect shows the girl character CP1 catching the fairy character CP2. A display (failure display) is made to let the character CP2 escape.

In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), a success display is made at timing tb9, and the transition is made to a reach display. At timing tb9, a stage is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and a scoreboard is displayed above the stage. Then, the girl character CP1, which had been waiting (stopped) at the corner of the display screen 253a, moves toward the stage, and after reaching the stage, a singing performance is performed (for example, in FIG. 34(b) )reference).

When the singing performance ends, the numbers that have been variably displayed on the scoreboard are stopped and displayed, and based on the stopped and displayed numbers (scores), the success or failure result of the game round is announced. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(b), if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, "100 points" will be displayed on the scoreboard and the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row will be displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot is displayed at the final stop. On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to a winning result, "0 points" will be displayed on the scoreboard, and at the same time, the middle symbol row that has been continuously fluctuating will stop, and the winning result will be displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to is displayed at the final stop. In this way, the timing at which the symbols are stopped and displayed after the reach effect is synchronized with the timing at which the fluctuating display of the symbols on the operating mouth display section of the main display unit 87 ends.

In addition, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, 5 seconds may be set as the variable display time in a part of the game round corresponding to a complete loss (see FIG. 24). The sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (1 sec) matches the execution time (6 sec) of the branch performance in the game round corresponding to the ready-to-reach display. In a game round corresponding to a complete miss, after a failure display is executed in a branch performance, the game round ends without transitioning to a reach display.

As already explained, the high-frequency support mode is roughly divided into one that shifts after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a variable jackpot result, and one that shifts after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a normal jackpot result. Regarding the latter, in particular, when the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches a preset termination standard number of times, the game shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The above-mentioned time-saving production mode will also end with the transition to the low-frequency support mode. At the time of this transition, a performance (end suggestion performance) corresponding to the end of the time-saving performance mode is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(a2), in the game round related to the end of the time-saving performance mode, the display screen 253a darkens during the variable display to the fixed display. Then, at the end of the final display, the darkening is canceled, the reduced display of the symbols is canceled, and the display is switched to a display corresponding to the normal production mode. The termination suggestion performance is configured to be able to occur in game times other than the game time related to the end of the time-saving performance mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a becomes dark during the variable display to fixed display, the display in the time-saving production mode continues after the darkening is canceled with the end of the fixed display (FIG. 34 (a2) →See (a1)).

During the time-saving production mode, a production suggesting the content of the pending information stored in the pending ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 (preliminary presentation) is performed with a predetermined probability before the game round related to the pending information starts. It is configured to be executed. By executing the performance corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been selected for lottery at a timing before the game round related to the hold information, the player can enjoy the hold corresponding to the game round currently in progress. In addition to the game of checking the lottery result of information, a game of checking or predicting the result when pending information that will later be the target of lottery is selected according to the content of the above-mentioned performance has been added, diversifying the game. is planned. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In order to make such a preview performance possible, the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 collects information such as whether or not it corresponds to a jackpot result before the game session related to the stored pending information starts. It is configured to specify the destination. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 36, various processes for preview effects executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, specifically, suspension executed as part of the information acquisition process (see FIG. 19). A supplementary explanation will be given of the preview confirmation process and the pending command setting process.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the reservation notice confirmation process, in step S1301, the active reservation memory number N and the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area of the reservation ball storage area 432 are read out, and the reservation number CRN is read out. Information on the number is stored in a register of the MPU 402. Thereafter, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is checked whether the pending information acquired by the current prize winning includes information about the jackpot winning. Specifically, first, in step S1302, information for jackpot determination among the pending information acquired in step S304 above based on the current winning to the operating ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired winning random number counter C1 is determined. Understand.

In the following step S1303, it is determined whether the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether a high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, it is determined whether the current win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode. If it is the low probability mode, proceed to step S1304, and refer to the win/fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) and the information for jackpot determination (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302. Then, it is determined whether the information is included in the information group corresponding to the jackpot win. If it is the high probability mode, the process advances to step S1305, and the win/fail table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) and the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1302 (value of the winning random number counter C1) are , and identify whether the information is included in the information set as a jackpot.

After executing each process in step S1304 or step S1305, the process advances to step S1306. If the information for jackpot determination (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to a jackpot win, an affirmative decision is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1307. After the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1307, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended.

In addition, in the process of step S1307, information for jackpot type determination among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning is grasped, that is, the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is referred to. to determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1407 includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

If the information for jackpot determination (value of hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 does not correspond to jackpot winning, a negative determination is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information for out-of-reach determination among the reservation information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the operating ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the subsequent step S1309, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the reach determined in step S1308 is determined. It is determined whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process in step S1309, the process advances to step S1310, and it is determined whether the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, in step S1311, the information on the occurrence of a reach is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and then the present confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is ended as is.

(Pending command setting process)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the pending command setting process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. It is determined whether the information is identified as corresponding to a jackpot win. If the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S1402, and a jackpot response pending command is set. Note that the settings of the above commands and various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404. Note that the jackpot response pending command includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that jackpot information is not stored in the register of the MPU 402, the process advances to step S1403, and a check is made as to whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. By determining , it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination was identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation process for pending notice (FIG. 35). If the reach occurrence information is stored, an out-of-reach response suspension command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete out-of-reach response retention command is set in step S1405.

When setting a pending command in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the pending command. . When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same way as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S708 above. The hold command set in this manner is transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can grasp the fluctuating display mode of the symbols, etc. based on the hold command. Note that, as already explained, in the case of a complete loss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of pending information stored when starting the game round related to the pending information. Therefore, when setting a complete failure handling hold command, a temporary setting of the variable display time is performed.

The notification/performance control device 140 determines whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the hold command received from the main control device 162 and the lottery table for preview performance. Regarding the lottery table for the preview performance, it is set in the following order: pending command corresponding to completely out-of-reach result < pending command corresponding to out-of-reach result < pending command corresponding to jackpot result. Regarding the types of effects in the preview performance, there are six patterns: white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the pseudo continuous fluctuation display described above, and the expectation level for the jackpot result is white < blue. The colors are set in the order of <yellow <green <red <rainbow. In addition, among the effect colors in the preview performance, green to rainbow correspond to the reach display, and the rainbow corresponds to the jackpot, which is the same as the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and it is confirmed that the reach display will occur. If you have not done so, the effect will not be green or higher, nor will the effect be rainbow if it is not certain that it will be a jackpot.

If a suspended command is received in a situation where no effect is occurring, it is determined whether or not the effect is to be generated in a game session prior to the game session related to the pending command, and the effect is determined to occur. When a hold command is received under such a situation, it is determined whether or not to rank up the color of the effect in a game round earlier than the game round related to the hold command. The effect once generated is erased by either the mode transition effect or the reach effect described above.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous variation display described above, the effect display is completed during one game round, whereas in the preview performance, the effect display continues over multiple game rounds. They differ in some respects. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous variation display, the number of pseudo-continuous variations was configured to match the color of the effect, but in the preview performance, the number of games played during the preview performance and the color of the effect do not necessarily match. . In other words, in the preview performance, the color of the effect may not change (step up) even if the game progresses.

Here, an overview of the preview effect will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 37(a). In FIG. 37(a), there are two pieces of pending information that are held after the game round that is currently being executed, and the preview performance is started with the second of these pieces of pending information (the pending information that corresponds to the jackpot result) as a trigger. This example shows the case where

When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is finally stopped and displayed (determined display), a preview performance is started using the next pending information (winning result) as a trigger. In this preview performance, a white effect is added to the display screen 253a along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. This effect will be carried over to the next game.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is finally stopped and displayed (determined display) in the next game round, the color of the effect is changed from white to blue. This suggests that the possibility of a reach display (jackpot) occurring has increased. This effect will be carried over to the next game round (that is, the corresponding game round that triggered the suspension notice). The corresponding game round corresponds to the reach display, and the effects being displayed will be deleted when the main game round (ready-to-reach display) ends.

In this embodiment, the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the high-frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the low-frequency support mode, which speeds up the game progress. It is planned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), in the low frequency support mode, the variable display time corresponding to the reach display is set to 18 seconds to 28 seconds, whereas in the high frequency support mode, the variable display time is set to 18 seconds to 28 seconds. The variable display time corresponding to reach display is unified to 17 seconds. The reach displays executed in the high-frequency support mode are all configured to be super reach D as described above.

Here, in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the production mode becomes the special production mode, so that the main production including the reach display becomes the same as the time-saving production mode. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time-saving effect mode is occurring during the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode, and This prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

However, since the special production mode is only a production mode that is executed during the low-frequency support mode, even if the same production as the special production mode (Super Reach D) is executed, the display time will vary accordingly. is not shortened. In other words, even if the main control device 162 sets a variable display time corresponding to normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, or super reach C, the notification/effect control device 140 Based on the fact that the performance mode is a special performance mode, Super Reach D is executed instead of these various types of reach. In this case, there will be a difference in the variable display time between Super Reach D executed in the high-frequency support mode and Super Reach D executed in the special effect mode, but in this embodiment, such a difference will occur. One of the features is that the flow of performance in the special performance mode is brought closer to the flow of performance in the time-saving performance mode by making good use of the parts where differences occur. The configuration related to the special effect mode will be described below.

First, returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 28, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104 of the fluctuation start process, that is, if the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444, step The process advances to S1106. In step S1106, performance determination processing for the special performance mode is executed. After executing the production determination process in step S1106, a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the determined content in step S1108, and after executing the game round production start process in step S1109, the main variation start Finish the process. Here, the performance determination process for the special performance mode will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 39.

(Production decision processing for special production mode)
As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the performance determination process for the special performance mode, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (that is, a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result). judge. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a missed reach. If an affirmative determination is made in either step S1501 or step S1502, a special effect setting process for reach is executed in step S1503. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in both step S1501 and step S1502, that is, if the current game round corresponds to a complete loss, a special effect setting process for a complete loss is executed in step S1504.

(Special effect setting processing for reach)
As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the special effect setting process for the ready-to-win, first, in step S1511, the time from the start of variation to the transition to the ready-to-win display is specified. As already explained, in the special effect mode, the reach display is unified to super reach D. In other words, super reach D will be executed regardless of whether 18 seconds to 28 seconds is specified as the variable display time by the main controller 162 (see FIG. 37(b)). In this embodiment, the execution time of the reach display in Super Reach D is stipulated to be 10 seconds, and by subtracting the execution time of Super Reach D from the variable display time in this game round, the transition to the reach display is made. The time required to do so will be determined.

In the following step S1512, the value obtained by dividing the time required to shift to the reach display by the reference time, that is, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the section before the reach display in the relevant game round by the reference time (in the following explanation, each divided section (also referred to as "part"). Here, the reference time will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIG. 24(c). As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls fired to the right route receive support from the electric accessory 91 and enter the lower operating port 83b. Therefore, under the situation where game balls are continuously fired to the right route during the high-frequency support mode, the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 83b changes between "2" and "4", and most games For each time, the variable display time is 1 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec. In other words, the time required for one game round is 2 seconds in most cases.

The character ROM 476 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores a production whose playback time is 2 seconds (a video in which the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a), and in the time-saving production mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. The performance is configured to be played repeatedly. This time is the reference time. In the following explanation, the above-mentioned moving image and the variable display to stop display (including both temporary stop display and final display) of symbols performed in parallel to the moving image will be referred to as "first special performance." In addition, at the time of temporary stop display in the special production mode, a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed in order to resemble the time-saving production mode. Incidentally, in the special effect mode, a configuration is realized in which the first special effect etc. are used to make it appear as if the game rounds are proceeding one after another in a pseudo manner, but these individual fluctuations are referred to as "pseudo fluctuations" or "unit changes". Also called "display".

For example, when the variable display time is 18 seconds, the time required to display the reach is 8 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the number of divisions is "4". When the variable display time is 20 seconds, the time required to display the reach is 10 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the number of divisions is "5". When the variable display time is 22 seconds, the time required to display the reach is 12 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the number of divisions is "6". When the variable display time is 24 seconds, the time required to display the reach is 14 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the number of divisions is "7". When the variable display time is 26 seconds, the time until the reach display is 16 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the number of divisions is "8". When the variable display time is 28 seconds, the time required to display the reach is 18 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the number of divisions is "9".

In the subsequent step S1513, the upper limit (consecutive number) of the first special effect that can be executed continuously in the section before shifting to the reach display is determined by referring to the continuous number setting table and the random number for lottery stored in the ROM 443. Set. Specifically, a first consecutive number of times and a second consecutive number of times that allow the first special performance to be executed continuously are set.

Note that the first consecutive number of times and the second consecutive number of times in this embodiment both indicate the number of times that the first special performance has been executed consecutively without intervening the second special performance or the third special performance described later. Yes, for example, if the first special performance is performed once, the first consecutive number = "1", and if the first special performance is performed twice consecutively, the second consecutive number = "2". . On the other hand, the number of continuous fluctuation displays from which the initial special performance is set to "0" and ends with the second special performance or the third special performance is referred to as the "continuous fluctuation number" and is distinguished from the number of consecutive fluctuations. For example, if the first special performance is performed once, the number of continuous fluctuations = "0", if the first special performance is performed twice in a row, the number of consecutive fluctuations = "1", and the first special performance is If the second special effect is executed after the second special effect has been executed twice in a row, the number of continuous fluctuations is ``2''. Incidentally, in each of the figures such as FIGS. 40 and 41 referred to in the following explanation, the number of continuous fluctuations in each part is expressed by a number.

When the present game round corresponds to a winning reach, the consecutive number setting table for a winning reach stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. The consecutive number setting table for the missed reach has "1" to "5" as the first consecutive number, and any one of these five candidates is set as the first consecutive number in this game round.

When the present game round corresponds to the winning and reaching, the consecutive number of winning and reaching setting table stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. The successive number setting table for hit reach has "1" to "6" as the first consecutive number, and any one of these six candidates is set as the first consecutive number in this game round.

In the consecutive number setting table for a missed reach, the selection rate increases in the order of "5" < "4" < "3", "2", and "1", and in the consecutive number setting table for a hit reach, the selection rate increases in the order of "1" < " The selection probability increases in the order of ``2'' < ``3'' < ``6'' < ``5'' < 4. Therefore, the higher the number of consecutive games, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, the consecutive number of "6" corresponds to a jackpot, and if the consecutive number of times becomes "6", that is, if the consecutive fluctuation number including the second special effect becomes "6", then at that point It becomes clear that the jackpot is confirmed. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the number of continuous fluctuations is "6", the effect described later becomes rainbow-colored.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the first special effect group may be divided into two parts by intervening the second special effect in the section before the reach display. The second consecutive number of times defines, for example, the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the first special performance in the first half section thus divided. The second consecutive number is set to "3" with the following exceptions.

The conditions for setting a value other than "3" as the second consecutive number include a case where it corresponds to a jackpot and the first consecutive number is equal to or greater than "5". In such a case, the second consecutive number may be increased to be the same as the first consecutive number. If the second consecutive number is raised from "3" to "4" to "6", an event may occur where the number of consecutive consecutive times reaches "4" but does not develop into a super reach. will function as a guaranteed performance that will guarantee you a jackpot right after that.

The RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores the number of times (continuous results) of the first special performance executed before the start of the game round (for example, in the previous game round), specifically, the number of times (continuous results) of the first special performance executed before the start of the game round, specifically, with other performances in between. A continuous counter is provided to store the number of times the first special effect is repeated without any failure (continuous result). The continuous counter is incremented by "1" each time the first special performance is executed, and becomes "0" when a performance other than the first special performance (for example, the second special performance or the third special performance described later) is performed. It is configured to be cleared. For example, if the first special performance is continuous over multiple game rounds executed before the relevant game round, that is, if the first special performance is repeated without any other special performance intervening in between. Even so, the continuous result counter will be incremented each time the first special effect is performed. In the following step S1514, the continuous result is identified with reference to this continuous counter.

Thereafter, in step S1515, a pattern setting process for a ready-to-reach effect (pattern setting process for a ready-to-reach effect) is executed, and then this special effect setting process is ended. Here, the ready-to-reach effect pattern setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

(Pattern setting process for reach effect)
In the ready-to-reach effect pattern setting process, first, in step S1601, the section (divided part) before the ready-to-win display in the game round is divided into two sections. Specifically, when executing Super Reach D in the special performance mode, a branch performance (hereinafter also referred to as a second special performance) will be passed through, as in the time-saving performance mode. The execution time of the second special performance (6 seconds in this embodiment) is an integral multiple of the above part (reference time). Therefore, the multiple parts before Super Reach D are used for the second special effect, and the section before the reach display is used as the first half section (first section) for the first special effect, and the second half section (second section) for the branch effect. section). Incidentally, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the second special performance from the section before the reach display becomes the time during which the first special performance can be executed in the first half section.

After dividing into the first half section/second half section in step S1601, the process advances to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the number of parts constituting the first half section is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of consecutive times (first number of consecutive times) set in step S1513. Although the details will be described later, if the first special effect is applied to all parts constituting the first half section and the number of consecutive times exceeds the first number of consecutive times, the flow of the effect will tend to feel strange. Therefore, if there is at least a possibility that the first consecutive number of times will be exceeded, a second special performance is arranged in any of the above parts in order to avoid the first special performance from continuing in a manner that exceeds the first consecutive number of times. The performance pattern is determined as follows. For example, the first special performance group is divided into two parts by interposing the second special performance between a plurality of consecutive first special performances.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process advances to step S1603. In step S1603, referring to the value of the continuous counter, it is determined whether the continuous result from the previous game round is "0", that is, whether the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect. judge.

If the value of the continuous counter is "0", in step S1604, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and second special performance) in this game round is executed without considering the flow from the previous game round. decide. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores a first special pattern table according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, etc. In the process, one corresponding to the current conditions is selected from among the first special pattern tables, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected first special pattern table. The first special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to jackpot results and a table group corresponding to losing results.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that the performance pattern with a large number of successive first special effects before moving to the reach display is more likely to be selected compared to the performance pattern with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

For example, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, if the first consecutive number is "6", the second consecutive number is "2", and the number of parts in the first half section is "6", in the first special pattern table group, Select the one that meets those conditions. The first special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A1, B1, C1, and D1 (see FIG. 40(a)).

The production pattern A1 is configured to apply the first special production to all parts from the first part to the sixth part, and the intervention of the second special production between the consecutive first special productions is avoided. Ru. When a game round is executed with this effect pattern A1, the first special effect is repeated six times before moving to the second section, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and all symbol rows change in the aforementioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed six times, and the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special performance executed in the second section is six times. Then, the super reach D will be executed through the second special effect.

The production pattern B1 has a configuration in which the first special production is applied to the first part, the second special production is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special production is applied to the fifth to sixth parts. The special performance group is divided into front and rear parts by the second special performance. In this effect pattern B1, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, after the first special effect is executed at the beginning of the game round, the second special effect is executed until the transition to the second section. The first special performance is repeated twice. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and all symbol rows change in the aforementioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed twice immediately before the second section, and the number of continuous fluctuations is 2 when including the second special effect that is subsequently executed in the second section. times. Then, the super reach D will be executed through the second special effect.

The production pattern C1 has a configuration in which the first special production is applied to the first part to the second part, the second special production is applied to the third part to the fifth part, and the first special production is applied to the sixth part. The performance group is divided into front and rear parts by the second special performance. The production pattern D1 has a configuration in which the second special production is applied to the first to third parts, and the first special production is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and after the second special production is executed at the beginning. The first special performance continues.

In the first special pattern table corresponding to winning results detailed above, the number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern C1 < effect pattern B1 < effect pattern D1 < effect pattern A1. In addition, the selection rate of each performance pattern also increases in the order of performance pattern C1 < performance pattern B1 < performance pattern D1 < performance pattern A1.

In the table group corresponding to the out-of-reach result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that performance patterns with a large number of consecutive first special performances before moving to the reach display are more likely to be selected than performance patterns with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The configuration is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

In this way, one game round is divided into multiple game rounds in a pseudo manner so that the game round appears to be progressing at a short pitch, giving the player the impression that they are in a time-saving production mode. can give.

Returning to the explanation of step S1603 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1603, if the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (if the value of the continuous counter is not 0), In step S1605, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) for this game round is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores a second special pattern table according to various conditions such as the winning lottery result, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. are stored, and in the process of step S1604, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among these second special pattern tables, and a presentation pattern is determined by referring to the selected second special pattern table.

The second special effect pattern table, like the first special effect pattern table, is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to jackpot results and a table group corresponding to miss results. For any table group, the intervention point of the second special performance is defined so that the number of consecutive games does not exceed the upper limit (first number of consecutive games) when the previous game round is taken into account.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that the performance pattern with a large number of successive first special effects before moving to the reach display is more likely to be selected compared to the performance pattern with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

For example, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the first consecutive number is "6", the second consecutive number is "6", the number of parts in the first half section is "6", and the consecutive number from the previous game round is "1". In this case, the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is referred to (see FIG. 40(b)). The second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A2, B2, and C2.

Production pattern A2 has a configuration in which the second special production is applied to the first to third parts, and the first special production is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the second special production is executed at the beginning. Afterwards, the first special performance continues. When a game round is executed with this performance pattern A2, as shown in Example 1 of the schematic diagram in FIG. 42, by executing the second special performance at the beginning of the first section, the previous game round is The sequence from 1 to 2 will be interrupted before reaching the above upper limit. In the first section, the first special performance is repeated three times before the second special performance ends and the second section moves on. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and all symbol rows change in the aforementioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed three times, and the number of consecutive times when the second special effect executed in the second section is included is three times. Then, the super reach D will be executed through the second special effect.

The production pattern B2 has a configuration in which the first special production is applied to the first part, the second special production is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special production is applied to the fifth to sixth parts. The special performance group is divided into front and rear parts by the second special performance. When performance pattern B2 is executed as a performance pattern, as shown in example 2 of the schematic diagram in FIG. 42, the first special performance is executed once at the beginning of the first section, and then the second special performance is executed. executed. Due to this second special effect, the continuity from the previous game round is interrupted before reaching the above upper limit. In the first section, the first special performance is repeated twice before the second special performance ends and the transition to the second section begins. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and all symbol rows change in the aforementioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed twice, and the number of consecutive times when the second special performance executed in the second section is included is two times. Then, the super reach D will be executed through the second special effect.

The production pattern C2 has a configuration in which the first special production is applied to the first to second parts, the second special production is applied to the third to fifth parts, and the first special production is applied to the sixth part. The performance group is divided into front and rear parts by the second special performance. At the beginning of the first section, the first special performance is performed twice, and then the second special performance is performed. Therefore, the number of consecutive games from the previous game is 4 times in the second special performance. Normally, four consecutive times corresponds to the development to Super Reach D, but in performance pattern C2, the first special performance is executed again after the second special performance, and the development to Super Reach D does not occur. This performance pattern C2 is one of the contradictory performances mentioned above.

In the second special pattern table corresponding to winning results detailed above, the number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern B1 < effect pattern A1, and the selection rate of each effect pattern increases. Also, the height increases in the order of performance pattern B1 < performance pattern A1. On the other hand, in the second special pattern table for losing results, the number of consecutive first special effects before the reach display is configured to be smaller than in the second special pattern table for winning results. Note that the selection rate at which the performance pattern C2 is selected is lower than the selection rate at which the performance pattern A2 and the performance pattern B2 are selected.

In the table group corresponding to the out-of-reach result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that performance patterns with a large number of consecutive first special performances before moving to the reach display are more likely to be selected than performance patterns with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The configuration is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

In this way, one game round is divided into multiple game rounds in a pseudo manner so that the game round appears to be progressing at a short pitch, giving the player the impression that they are in a time-saving production mode. can give.

Returning to the explanation of step S1602 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, that is, if the number of parts in the first half section is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process advances to step S1606. In step S1606, with reference to the value of the continuous counter, it is determined whether the continuous result from the previous game round is 0, that is, whether the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect. do.

If the value of the continuous counter is 0, in step S1607, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) for this game round is determined without considering the flow from the previous game round. . Specifically, a third special pattern table is stored in the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, etc. In the process, one corresponding to the current conditions is selected from among the third special pattern tables, and an effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected third special pattern table. The third special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to jackpot results and a table group corresponding to losing results.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that the performance pattern with a large number of successive first special effects before moving to the reach display is more likely to be selected compared to the performance pattern with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

In the table group corresponding to the out-of-reach result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that the performance pattern with a small number of successive first special effects before moving to the reach display is more likely to be selected compared to the performance pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The configuration is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

The basic structure of the third special pattern table is the same as that of the first special pattern table, but the first special effect is executed more frequently than the effect pattern where the first special effect is executed a small number of times in succession before shifting to the reach display. The bias in the selection rate is increasing. In the game round where the third special pattern table is referred to, the number of parts in the first half section tends to be smaller than the game round where the first special pattern table is referred to. By increasing the bias in the selection rate as described above, even if the number of parts in the first half section is small, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive times and the number of consecutive fluctuations before reach display.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the previous game round has ended with something other than the first special effect (if the continuous counter is not 0), step S1608 In this step, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) for this game round is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, a fourth special pattern table is stored in the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, etc. In the process, one corresponding to the current conditions is selected from among the fourth special pattern tables, and an effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected fourth special pattern table. The fourth special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to jackpot results and a table group corresponding to losing results.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that the performance pattern with a large number of successive first special effects before moving to the reach display is more likely to be selected compared to the performance pattern with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to increase.

In the table group corresponding to the out-of-reach result, a difference is made in the selection rate so that performance patterns with a large number of consecutive first special performances before moving to the reach display are more likely to be selected than performance patterns with a small number of successive first special effects. , when intervening with a second special performance to limit the number of consecutive performances according to the above upper limit, the first special performance after the second special performance among the first special performance group (part) divided into front and back by the second special performance. The configuration is such that the number of consecutive special effects tends to decrease.

The basic structure of the fourth special pattern table is the same as that of the second special pattern table, but the first special effect is performed more frequently than the effect pattern where the first special effect is executed a small number of times in succession before moving to the ready-to-reach display. The bias in the selection rate is increasing. In the game round where the fourth special pattern table is referred to, the number of parts in the first half section tends to be smaller than the game round where the second special pattern table is referred to. As described above, by increasing the bias in selection rate, even if the number of parts in the first half section is small, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive times before reach display.

As described in detail above, by creating a structure in which one game round is divided into multiple game rounds in a pseudo manner to make it appear as if the game round is progressing at short pitches, the player feels as if they are in a time-saving production mode. can give a good impression.

After executing the processing in steps S1604 to S1608, the process advances to step S1609, and effect setting processing is executed. In the special effect mode in this embodiment, an effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a while the first special effect is being repeated. There are cases. This effect has a total of six colors, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, similar to the effect displayed during the pseudo continuous variation display in the normal production mode, and white < blue < yellow < green < It is set so that the expectation of winning a jackpot increases in the order of red < rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1609, the final effect color and its step-up pattern are determined based on the current game result and the effect pattern determined in steps S1604 to S1608. In the case of a jackpot result, the final effect is likely to be selected in the order of white < blue < yellow < rainbow < green < red. The effect set in step S1609 is canceled when the reach display ends in this game round.

Incidentally, the effects displayed during the special performance mode may also be displayed during the game round corresponding to a completely missed result. For effects that started to be displayed in the game round that corresponds to a completely missed result, they are basically canceled when the second special effect, third special effect, or reach display ends, and the first special effect is canceled. The configuration is such that it cannot be canceled under repeated circumstances. For this reason, the effect display may continue across game rounds. Considering these circumstances, in the special effect mode, the number of consecutive first special effects and the number of step-ups of the effect do not necessarily match, and the color of the effect remains the same, so the number of step-ups changes. may decrease.

In the case of out-of-reach results, red < green < yellow < blue < white are more likely to be selected in the order of selection, and rainbow is not selected as a candidate. Further, although details will be described later, in the case of a completely off result, the final effect is likely to be selected in the order of yellow < blue < white, and green, red, and rainbow are excluded from the selection candidates. In the normal performance mode, rainbow colors correspond to jackpots, and green, red, and rainbow colors correspond to super reach. By removing some colors from the selection candidates depending on the game result, the display of effects in the normal performance mode and the display of effects in the special performance mode are related.

Returning to the explanation of the performance determination process for the special performance mode shown in FIG. 38(a), if a negative determination is made in both step S1501 and step S1502, that is, if the game round corresponds to a completely missed result, The process advances to step S1504. After executing the special performance setting process for completely missing in step S1504, the process for determining the performance for this special performance mode is ended. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the special effect setting process for complete failure will be explained.

(Special effect setting process for complete failure)
In the special effect setting process for complete failure, first, in step S1701, the number of divisions (number of parts) is calculated by dividing the variable display time of the game round by the above-mentioned reference time (2 seconds), which is the execution time of the first special effect. . If a remainder occurs due to division, this is rounded up and used as the division number. This is a contrivance to use a part of the fixed display time (2 sec) after the variable display time as the execution time for the first special effect, etc. In view of these circumstances, it can be said that in the calculation in step S1701, the entire interval, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (2 sec), is divided by the reference time. In this case, the remainder is rounded down.

For example, when the variable display time is 17 seconds, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 8 with a remainder of 1, and rounding up the fraction becomes "9". In other words, when the variable display time is 17 seconds, the number of parts is "9". When the variable display time is 15 seconds, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 7, which is rounded up to "8". In other words, when the variable display time is 15 seconds, the number of parts is "8". When the variable display time is 3 seconds, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 1, and the fraction is rounded up to "2". That is, when the variable display time is 3 seconds, the number of parts is "2". When the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 with a remainder of 0, and the fraction is rounded up to "1". That is, when the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of parts is "1".

In the following step S1702, the number of consecutive times (upper limit) that the first special effect can be executed continuously in this game round is determined by referring to the consecutive number setting table for complete failure stored in the ROM 443 and the random number for lottery. Set.

The consecutive number of times setting table for complete loss is provided with "1" to "3" as the consecutive number of times, and any one of these three candidates is set as the upper limit for this game round. The consecutive number setting table for complete failure is configured such that the selection probability increases in the order of "1" < "2" < "3". Even if a large upper limit is set due to the influence of the variable display time and the consecutive results in the previous game, the actual number of consecutive games will be smaller than that. Therefore, in game rounds that deal with complete misses, selection probabilities are deliberately defined in such a way that the upper limit is likely to be large, thereby suppressing the frequent occurrence of interventions such as the second special effect. .

In the subsequent step S1703, the number of times the first special performance was executed before the start of the main game round (for example, in the immediately previous game round) is determined by referring to the continuous counter provided in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140. (continuous result), more specifically, the number of times the first special performance is repeated without any other performance in between (continuous result) is specified.

After executing the process of step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not this game round is the last game round in the special effect mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the special effect mode end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. The special effect mode end flag is a flag stored in step S1209 of the special effect mode processing (see FIG. 29).

If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process advances to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether subsequent hold information is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process advances to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether the above effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. If a negative determination is made in step S1704 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process advances to step S1707, and after executing the first setting process in step S1707, the present complete failure effect pattern setting process is executed. finish. In other words, if it is not the last game in the continuous production mode and there is subsequent pending information, or if there is no subsequent pending information but no effect is generated, the first setting process is executed. It will be done. Here, the first setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 44.

(First setting process)
In the first setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether the total number of parts is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of consecutive parts. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process advances to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is 0, that is, whether consideration is required for the flow of the previous game round.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, if the previous game round has ended with something other than the first special performance, the process advances to step S1803. In step S1803, a performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) is determined with reference to the fifth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The fifth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1803, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among the fifth special pattern tables, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected fifth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit of the number of consecutive patterns is "3" and the total number of parts is "9", a pattern corresponding to these conditions is selected from each of the fifth special pattern tables. The fifth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A5, B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5 (see FIG. 45(a)).

Production pattern A5 has a configuration in which the first special production is applied to the first part to the third part, the second special production is applied to the fourth part to the sixth part, and the first special production is applied to the seventh part to the ninth part. The first special performance group is divided into two parts by the second special performance. In this effect pattern A5, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the first special effect is executed three times at the beginning of the game round, then the second special effect is executed, and from the second special effect The first special performance is repeated three times again until the game round ends. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and all symbol rows change in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed as the time passes is executed three times each with the second special effect in between. In other words, due to the intervening second special performance, the number of continuous fluctuations in the first half including the second special performance becomes "3", and the number of continuous fluctuations in the second half becomes "2". The game round ends with the number of consecutive fluctuations being "2".

Production pattern B5 includes a first special production for the first to second parts, a second special production for the third to fifth parts, a first special production for the sixth part, and a second special production for the seventh to ninth parts. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each. In this performance pattern B5, the first special performance is performed twice at the beginning of the game round, then the second special performance is performed, and the second special performance is performed again with one first special performance in between. Ru.

Production pattern C5 includes a first special production for the first part, a second special production for the second to fourth parts, a first special production for the fifth to sixth parts, and a second special production for the seventh to ninth parts. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each. In this performance pattern C5, the first special performance is performed once at the beginning of the game round, then the second special performance is performed, and the second special performance is performed again with two first special performances in between. Ru.

Performance pattern D5 includes a first special performance for the first part, a second special performance for the second to fourth parts, a first special performance for the fifth part, a second special performance for the sixth part to the eighth part, and a second special performance for the fifth part. The first special effect is applied to each of the nine parts. In this performance pattern D5, the first special performance and the second special performance are alternately executed.

The production pattern E5 has a configuration in which the second special production is applied to the first part to the third part, the first special production is applied to the fourth part to the sixth part, and the second special production is applied to the seventh part to the ninth part. ing. In this effect pattern E5, after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game round, the first special effect is executed three times, and then the second special effect is executed again.

Production pattern F5 includes the second special production for the first to third parts, the first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the first special production for the ninth part. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each. In this performance pattern F5, after the second special performance is performed at the beginning of the game round, the first special performance is performed twice, and then, after the second special performance, the first special performance is performed once again. Ru.

Production pattern G5 includes the second special production for the first part to the third part, the first special production to the fourth part, the second special production to the fifth part to the seventh part, and the first special production to the eighth part to the ninth part. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each. In this performance pattern G5, after the second special performance is performed at the beginning of the game round, the first special performance is performed once, and then, after the second special performance, the first special performance is performed again twice. Ru.

In this way, by using the first special effect and the second special effect together to create a structure in which one game round is divided into multiple game rounds in a pseudo manner, the player is given the impression that they are in a time-saving performance mode. can be given.

In the fifth special pattern table detailed above, the number of times the second special performance is executed (occupancy rate of part) in the performance pattern A5 is smaller than that in the performance patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5. , the selection rate of each effect pattern is also set so that effect pattern B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, G5 < effect pattern A5. This suppresses the appearance frequency of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in the fifth special pattern table, the game round ends at either the first special performance or the second special performance, but the number of consecutive fluctuations when the game round ends at the second special performance. is configured such that the number of consecutive fluctuations is ``3'' at the maximum, and the number of continuous fluctuations when the game round ends with the first special performance is ``2'' at the maximum. The reason why we created a performance pattern in which the game round ends with the first special performance is to ensure that there is an opportunity to carry over the continuous fluctuation number to the next game round, assuming that the next game round is coming up. It is. However, in such a configuration, it may be necessary to secure time to end the continuous fluctuation in the next game round. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in addition to the second special performance, a third special performance that is shorter in duration than the second special performance is provided as a special performance that triggers the end of the continuous fluctuation. There is. Regarding this third special performance, the required time is set so that even if the variable display time of the next game round is the shortest (for example, 1 sec), the third special performance can be executed. As a result, even if the continuous fluctuation is carried over to the next game round, the opportunity to end the continuous fluctuation in the next game round is guaranteed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (if the continuous result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S1804. move on. In step S1804, a performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) is determined with reference to the sixth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The sixth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the total number of parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game. In the process of step S1804, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among the sixth special pattern tables, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected sixth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the total number of parts is "9", and the continuous result from the previous game is "1", then the one corresponding to those conditions from each sixth special pattern table is selected. select. The sixth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A6, B6, C6, D6, and E6 (see FIG. 45(b)).

Production pattern A6 includes a first special production for the first part, a second special production for the second to fourth parts, a first special production for the fifth to sixth parts, and a second special production for the seventh to ninth parts. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each. In this performance pattern A6, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the first special performance is performed once at the beginning of the game round, then the second special performance is performed, and the second special performance ends. After that, the second special performance is performed again with two first special performances in between. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and all symbol rows change in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). The flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is temporarily stopped and displayed as time passes is executed a total of three times counting from the previous game round, and is executed again twice with the second special effect in between. In the first half of this game round, the number of consecutive fluctuations inherited from the previous game round will be suppressed to "3". Then, in the second half of the main game round, the game round ends with the second special performance, and the number of consecutive fluctuations is also suppressed to "2".

Performance pattern B6 includes a first special performance for the first part, a second special performance for the second to fourth parts, a first special performance for the fifth part, a second special performance for the sixth part to the eighth part, and a second special performance for the fifth part. The first special performance is applied to each of the nine parts, and the first special performance group is divided into two parts by the second special performance. In this performance pattern B6, the first special performance and the second special performance are alternately executed.

The production pattern C6 has a configuration in which the second special production is applied to the first to third parts, the first special production is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the second special production is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. ing.

Production pattern D6 includes a second special production for the first to third parts, a first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, a second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and a first special production for the ninth part. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each.

Production pattern E6 includes a second special production for the first to third parts, a first special production for the fourth part, a second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, and a first special production for the eighth to ninth parts. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each.

In this way, by using the first special effect and the second special effect together to create a structure in which one game round is divided into multiple game rounds in a pseudo manner, the player is given the impression that they are in a time-saving performance mode. can be given.

The sixth special pattern table described in detail above is configured such that the selection rate of performance patterns differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the sixth special pattern table specifies that when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 seconds) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The 6th special pattern table , that is, the sixth special pattern table Y, which is referred to when the reservation information related to the previous game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The sixth special pattern table It is set to be high. The 6th special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of production patterns A6 and B6 is lower than that of the 6th special pattern table has been done.

By configuring the first special effect to easily occur at the beginning of the subsequent game session when the previous game session and the subsequent game session are executed consecutively such that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is easily generated. 2. It suppresses giving the player the impression that the occurrence of a special performance indicates the start of a game round, and makes the break between game rounds less noticeable.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if the total number of parts in the current game round is less than the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether the value of the continuity counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process advances to step S1806. In step S1806, a performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) is determined with reference to the seventh special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The seventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1806, the one corresponding to the current conditions is selected from among the seventh special pattern tables, and the performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected seventh special pattern table.

The basic structure of the 7th special pattern table is the same as the 5th special pattern table, and the selection rate is set so that performance patterns with a large number of consecutive first special performances are more likely to be selected compared to performance patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects. There is a difference between The bias in the selection rate is larger than in the 5th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the 1st special performance. .

Returning to the explanation of step S1805, if a negative determination is made in step S1805, that is, if the previous game round has ended with something other than the first special effect (if the continuous counter is not 0), step S1807 In this step, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) for this game round is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores an eighth special pattern table according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the total number of parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1807, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among the eighth special pattern tables, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected eighth special pattern table.

The basic structure of the eighth special pattern table is the same as that of the sixth special pattern table, and the selection rate of performance patterns differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the eighth special pattern table specifies that when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game round, the corresponding The 8th special pattern table , that is, the eighth special pattern table Y, which is referred to when the reservation information related to the previous game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The eighth special pattern table . Compared to the eighth special pattern table preferential treatment has been abolished.

By configuring the first special effect to easily occur at the beginning of the subsequent game session when the previous game session and the subsequent game session are executed consecutively such that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is easily generated. 2. It suppresses giving the player the impression that the occurrence of a special performance indicates the start of a game round, and makes the break between game rounds less noticeable.

In addition, in the 8th special pattern table, similarly to the 6th special pattern, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that a performance pattern with a large number of consecutive first special performances is more likely to be selected compared to a performance pattern with a small number of consecutive first special performances. ing. However, the bias in this selection rate is larger than in the 6th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the 1st special effect. It has become.

After setting the effect pattern in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, effect setting processing is executed in step S1808, and then the first setting processing ends.

As already explained, in the special effect mode in this embodiment, under the situation where the first special effect is repeated, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is displayed along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. effects may be displayed. This effect has a total of 6 colors: white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors, similar to the effect displayed during the pseudo continuous variation display in the normal production mode, and white < blue < yellow < green. The odds of winning a jackpot are set in the order of <red <rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1808, based on the current game result and the performance pattern determined in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, whether or not to display the effect, the color of the effect, and its step-up pattern are determined. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may continue across game rounds until the main game round. Therefore, if an effect is inherited from the previous game, it is decided whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher level one, and if the color is updated, a step-up pattern to that color is determined. decide. Note that the step-up pattern also includes information on which part to cancel the effect and information on whether or not to carry over the effect to a subsequent game round.

If the effect display has not been inherited from the previous game, or if you want to cancel the effect midway even if it has been inherited, decide whether to generate a new effect or not, and change the effect color and step-up. Decide on a pattern. Incidentally, the step-up timing of the effect is configured to be the timing at which the temporarily stopped symbol starts to fluctuate again.

Returning to the explanation of the special effect setting process for complete failure in FIG. 43, if it is the last game in the special effect mode, or if the effect is being generated even though the subsequent pending information is not reserved, step S1708 After executing the second setting process, the process for setting the special performance for complete failure is ended. The second setting process will now be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47.

(Second setting process)
In the second setting process, first, in step S1901, a third special effect is set for the final part. The third special performance is a performance corresponding to the termination suggestion performance (see FIG. 34(a)) executed in the time-saving performance mode described above. Specifically, in the game round related to the end of the special performance mode, the display screen 253a darkens during the variable display to final display. Then, at the end of the final display, the darkening is canceled, the reduced display of the symbols is canceled, and the display is switched to a display corresponding to the normal production mode. The termination suggestion performance is configured to be able to occur in game times other than the game time related to the end of the time-saving performance mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a becomes dark during the variable display to final display, the display in the time-saving production mode continues after the darkening is canceled with the end of the final display.

For the third special effect, among the completion suggestion effect data stored in the display control device 410, data whose execution time matches the reference time (data whose execution time is 2 seconds) is used. In subsequent processing, performance patterns are determined for the remaining parts.

After executing the process in step S1901, the process advances to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether the number of parts remaining after excluding the final part is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of consecutive parts. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process advances to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, whether consideration is required for the flow of the previous game round.

If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, if the previous game round has ended with something other than the first special effect, the process advances to step S1904. In step S1904, the performance pattern (allocation pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) is determined with reference to the ninth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The ninth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive parts and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1904, the one corresponding to the current conditions is selected from among the ninth special pattern tables, and the performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected ninth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit of the consecutive number of times is "3" and the remaining number of parts is "8" (total number of parts is "9"), select one that corresponds to those conditions from each of the 9th special pattern tables. do. The ninth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A9, B9, C9, D9, and E9 (see FIG. 48(a)).

Production pattern A9 includes the first special production for the first to third parts, the second special production for the fourth to sixth parts, the first special production for the seventh to eighth parts, and the above-mentioned special production for the ninth part. The configuration is such that three special effects are applied to each one, and the first special effect group is divided into front and rear parts by the second special effect. The third special performance is executed in the last part of the game round, and the game round ends, and the special performance mode also ends accordingly.

Production pattern B9 includes the first special production for the first to second parts, the second special production for the third to fifth parts, the first special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special production for the ninth part. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each. In this effect pattern B9, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of the game round, then the second special effect is executed, and from the second special effect Three first special performances and one third special performance are executed until the game round ends. Due to the intervening second special performance, the number of continuous fluctuations in the first half becomes "3" including the second special performance, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the second half becomes "3" including the third special performance. Then, the special performance mode ends with this game round as an opportunity.

Performance pattern C9 includes a first special performance for the first part, a second special performance for the second to fourth parts, a first special performance for the fifth part, a second special performance for the sixth part to the eighth part, and a second special performance for the fifth part. The configuration is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

Production pattern D9 includes a second special production for the first to third parts, a first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, a second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and a third special production for the ninth part. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each.

Production pattern E9 includes a second special production for the first to third parts, a first special production for the fourth part, a second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, a first special production for the eighth part, and a first special production for the fifth part to the seventh part. The configuration is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

In the ninth special pattern table described in detail above, the number of executions (occupancy rate of part) of the second special performance in performance patterns A9 and B9 is smaller than that in performance patterns C9, D9, and E9, and each performance pattern The selection rate is also set so that performance patterns C9, D9, E9 < performance patterns A9, B9. This suppresses the appearance frequency of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, if a negative determination is made in step S1903, and if the previous game round has ended with the first special effect (if the continuous result is not "0"), the process advances to step S1904. . In step S1904, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) is determined with reference to the 10th special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The tenth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the number of remaining parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1904, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among the tenth special pattern tables, and the performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected tenth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the number of remaining parts is "8" (the total number of parts is "9"), and the continuous result from the previous game is "1", then each 10th special pattern table Select the one that meets those conditions. The 19th special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A10, B10, and C10 (see FIG. 48(b)).

Performance pattern A10 includes a first special performance for the first part, a second special performance for the second to fourth parts, a first special performance for the fifth part, a second special performance for the sixth part to the eighth part, and a second special performance for the fifth part. The configuration is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

Production pattern B10 includes a second special production for the first to third parts, a first special production for the fourth to fifth parts, a second special production for the sixth to eighth parts, and a third special production for the ninth part. The configuration is such that special effects are applied to each.

The production pattern C10 includes a second special production for the first to third parts, a first special production for the fourth part, a second special production for the fifth to seventh parts, a first special production for the eighth part, and a first special production for the eighth part. The configuration is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts. In this performance pattern C10, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. Due to the production, the number of continuous fluctuations in the beginning is "2" including the second special performance, the number of continuous fluctuations in the middle is "1" including the second special performance, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the final stage is the third. It is ``1'' including special effects. Then, the special performance mode ends with this game round as an opportunity.

In the 10th special pattern table described in detail above, similarly to the 6th special pattern table described above, the selection rate of performance patterns is different depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the 10th special pattern table specifies that when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The 10th special pattern table , that is, the 10th special pattern table Y, which is referred to when the reservation information related to the previous game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The 10th special pattern table It is set. The tenth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the production pattern A10 is lower than that of the tenth special pattern table X.

By configuring the first special effect to easily occur at the beginning of the subsequent game session when the previous game session and the subsequent game session are executed consecutively such that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is easily generated. 2. It suppresses giving the player the impression that the occurrence of a special performance indicates the start of a game round, and makes the break between game rounds less noticeable.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1902, that is, if the number of remaining parts of the current game round is less than the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether the value of the continuity counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect pattern (distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the 11th special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The eleventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive parts and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1907, one corresponding to the current conditions is selected from among the eleventh special pattern tables, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected eleventh special pattern table.

The basic structure of the 11th special pattern table is the same as the 9th special pattern table, and the selection rate is set so that performance patterns with a large number of consecutive first special performances are more likely to be selected compared to performance patterns with a small number of consecutive first special effects. There is a difference between The bias in the selection rate is larger than in the 5th special pattern table, and even if the number of remaining parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the 1st special performance. .

Returning to the explanation of step S1906, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, that is, if the previous game round has ended with something other than the first special effect (if the continuous counter is not 0), step S1908 In this step, the performance pattern (distribution pattern of the first special performance and the second special performance) for this game round is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores a 12th special pattern table according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the number of remaining parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round. In the process of step S1908, one corresponding to the current condition is selected from among the twelfth special pattern tables, and a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected twelfth special pattern table.

The basic structure of the 12th special pattern table is the same as that of the 10th special pattern table, and the selection rate of performance patterns differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, in the 12th special pattern table, when the interval time from the previous game round matches the fixed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, when the previous game round ends, the corresponding The 12th special pattern table , that is, the 12th special pattern table Y, which is referred to when the reservation information related to the previous game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The twelfth special pattern table . The twelfth special pattern table Y is set so that, compared to the twelfth special pattern table X, the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is lower.

By configuring the first special effect to easily occur at the beginning of the subsequent game session when the previous game session and the subsequent game session are executed consecutively such that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is easily generated. 2. It has the same function as the 10th special pattern table in that it suppresses giving the impression to the player that the occurrence of a special effect indicates the start of a game round, and makes the break between game rounds less noticeable. has been granted.

In addition, in the 12th special pattern table, similarly to the 10th special pattern, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that a performance pattern with a large number of consecutive first special performances is more likely to be selected compared to a performance pattern with a small number of consecutive first special performances. ing. However, the bias in this selection rate is larger than in the 10th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the 1st special effect. It has become.

After setting the effect pattern in steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908, effect setting processing is executed in step S1909, and then the second setting processing ends.

The effect setting process in step S1909 is similar to the effect setting process in step S1809, and is based on the current game result and the effect pattern determined in steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908. Determine the color and its step-up pattern. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may continue across game rounds until the main game round. Therefore, if an effect is inherited from the previous game, it is decided whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher level one, and if the color is updated, a step-up pattern to that color is determined. decide. Note that the step-up pattern also includes information regarding which part to cancel the effect.

If the effect display has not been inherited from the previous game, or if you want to cancel the effect midway even if it has been inherited, decide whether to generate a new effect or not, and change the effect color and step-up. Decide on a pattern. The second setting process is to determine the performance pattern for the final game round in the special performance mode, and all displayed effects will be canceled by the end of the game round.

According to the special performance mode detailed above, by dividing one game into multiple parts, it is possible to generate a performance similar to the performance mode (time-saving performance mode) compatible with the high-frequency support mode during the low-frequency support mode. It becomes. In the time-saving presentation mode, the lottery mode may be a high-probability mode, so there are many opportunities to win a jackpot during the time-saving presentation mode. In other words, the player's attention is more likely to be focused than during the normal performance mode. Therefore, by making it appear as if the same performance as the time-saving performance mode is being performed using the special performance mode, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. Considering that games are often played in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode, diversifying the effects in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode as described above will improve the interest of the game. It is effective in achieving this goal.

When performing the same performance in the special performance mode as in the time-saving performance mode, the way the player perceives the performance may vary greatly depending on the player's skill level, knowledge, etc. For example, in the case of a player who is not accustomed to the game, it is assumed that the special performance mode is recognized by its appearance as a performance mode similar to the time-saving performance mode, and the above-mentioned effect can be exerted. For players who are familiar with the game, it is difficult to identify that the base game states of the special production mode and time-saving production mode are different in the first place, even if they look similar. It is assumed that there is no. In addition, if the stored pending information includes information that corresponds to a jackpot result, it will be easier to transition to the special production mode than when it does not include anything that corresponds to a jackpot result. If the configuration is such that the propriety information is added to the transition condition to the special performance mode, it is possible to suppress the discrepancy between expectations for the special performance mode and expectations for the time-saving performance mode.

On the other hand, in the case of a player with a certain degree of knowledge, there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous fluctuation display that occurs in the normal performance mode and the continuous fluctuation in the special performance mode are the same. In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, the expectation of a jackpot increases dramatically as the number of consecutive changes increases, so it is assumed that the game is played with the expectation that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation will continue. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 50, if a game round is divided into multiple parts and the first special effect is executed in all the parts, the behavior can be brought closer to the time-saving effect mode. The number of continuous fluctuations will increase significantly. In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, if the number of times is 4, a super reach or higher is confirmed, and if the number is 6 times, a jackpot is confirmed. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive fluctuations in the special production mode exceeds these thresholds, it will not lead to a jackpot even if the number of consecutive fluctuations increases, which is a factor that increases player dissatisfaction and reduces their desire to play. There are concerns that this will happen. In other words, when realizing a performance similar to a performance mode for a normal gaming state that supports a high-frequency support mode within the constraints of a performance mode for a normal gaming state that supports a low-frequency support mode, it is necessary to prevent misunderstandings among players. Some ingenuity will be needed.

In this regard, in the special effect mode shown in this embodiment, the second special effect is intervened in the first special effect group to indicate the end of the continuous fluctuation (make it appear that the continuous fluctuation has been interrupted), thereby causing the above-mentioned problems. This suppresses the occurrence of

In the notification/effect control device 140 that has acquired the variable display time information from the main control device 162, the variable display time is divided by the reference time. Then, a performance pattern is determined by allocating the first to third special performances to each of the divided parts. For the first special performance, the same performance data as the performance executed in the time-saving performance mode is used, and the amount of data related to the game performance is reduced.

In addition, although the variable display time can be set in various ways, by calculating the number of parts by the above calculation and switching the table to be referred to based on the result, it is possible to set the variable display time in various ways. This is preferable because it can promote data sharing. For example, even if the variable display times are different, if the number of parts and various conditions are the same, the same table can be referred to. Therefore, this is advantageous compared to the case where a table is provided for each variable display time.

Here, the execution time of the second special performance and the third special performance is an integral multiple of the execution time of the first special performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of excess or shortage of time due to the allocation of the first to third special effects. This is a preferable configuration for smoothing the flow of the performance.

Note that the execution time of the third special performance is the same length (same size) as the execution time of the first special performance. Specifically, it is 2 seconds, which is shorter than the sum of the shortest variable display time of 1 second during the low frequency support mode and the fixed display time of 2 seconds. Therefore, if the fluctuation display time for at least one part can be secured, it is possible to stop the continuity of the first special performance, and in any game round in the special performance mode, the continuous fluctuation can be interrupted and It is possible to suitably terminate the special performance mode. Further, this third special performance is also useful when attempting to improve the degree of freedom of performance patterns by linking with the previous game round and the subsequent game round.

In the time-saving performance mode, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the right route, each game round will proceed in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the first special performance, both the variable display time and the temporary stop display time are set to 1 sec, and the execution time of the first special performance is matched to one game in the time-saving performance mode. In this case, in a situation where the first special effect is repeated, the appearance becomes similar to the progress in the special effect mode, and the mimicry effect can be suitably exhibited. However, the fixed display time in the game round in the low-frequency support mode is 2 seconds, which is longer than the fixed display time (1 sec) in the game round in the high-frequency support mode. For this reason, in the special performance mode, the flow of performance may feel strange due to the influence of the interval between game rounds. It is assumed that such a sense of discomfort becomes noticeable when game rounds corresponding to complete misses are repeated.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, in a game round corresponding to a complete loss, a part of the special effect set at the end overlaps with the confirmed display. This makes it possible to make the interval appear shorter than it actually is. Specifically, all the variable display times in the game rounds corresponding to a complete loss are odd numbers, and are not divisible by the even reference time. The value obtained by subtracting this remainder from the reference time is shorter than the final display time. This creates a base for using part of the final display time as time for special effects. In this way, by devising the length of the variable display time, the length of the reference time, and the length of the fixed display time, it is possible to solve the above problems without making major changes to the existing configuration. .

In the special performance mode, a second special performance intervenes to prevent the number of consecutive performances from becoming excessive. This effect also occurs in the time-saving effect mode. As shown in FIGS. 24(b) and 24(c), in the game round that corresponds to a complete loss, no matter what number of stored hold information is, it corresponds to the second special effect (branch effect). A variable display time may be set. This suppresses the second special performance from being noticeable in the special performance mode.

In the time-saving production mode, although the speed at which the game is played becomes faster, there is a possibility that the game progress becomes monotonous. Therefore, by first specifying the hold information related to the subsequent game round and executing a preview performance (effect display) based on the result, monotony of the performance is suppressed. Here, in the special effect mode, the effect display is executed according to the effect pattern in the relevant game round. In this way, by performing the same display performance as in the time-saving performance mode, the discrepancy between the time-saving performance mode and the special performance mode is suppressed.

In the special effect mode, the number of times the first to third special effects (unit display) have been executed is stored, and the number of times the special effect (unit display) has been executed is at least the minimum end standard number of times in the high frequency support mode. The special effect mode will be maintained until the same number of times as . This suppresses the discrepancy between the special performance mode and the time-saving performance mode.

The various special pattern tables are configured such that the number of executions of the first special effect tends to increase. Since the occurrence rate of branch performances is low even in the time-saving performance mode, the occurrence of such inconveniences is suppressed by suppressing the occurrence of the second special performance.

Increasing the degree of freedom in setting the first special performance by linking with the previous and subsequent game rounds ensures as many opportunities to execute the first special performance as possible in a configuration where an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive times. preferred above.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the time required for the ready-to-reach display when super reach D is executed in the special effect mode is set to be constant. In this embodiment, a plurality of reach display times (for example, long/short) are provided, and one of these times is selected each time the super reach D is executed. One of its characteristics is that it is The configuration related to the special effect mode in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores a required time selection table for ready-to-reach display that defines the required time for ready-to-reach display in the game round corresponding to super reach D. In the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140, when the fluctuation start command and the type command are received from the main control device 162, the game round to be executed this time is determined based on the fluctuation display time information, validity information, etc. included in these commands. It is determined whether or not the game corresponds to Super Reach D, and if the current game round corresponds to Super Reach D, the required time (long/short) is determined by referring to the required time selection table. Note that the difference between these required times is set to be an integral multiple of the reference time mentioned above.

If the time required for the reach display is different, the length of the remaining time excluding the time required for the reach display will also be different even if the variable display time is the same. That is, the calculation result when calculating the number of parts in the special effect setting process for the ready-to-reach (step S1512) shown in FIG. 38(b) depends on the time required for the ready-to-reach display.

As shown in the schematic diagram in Figure 51, when "Long" is selected as the time required for reach display (see example 2), the number of parts before reach display is five; When "Short" is selected as the required time (see Example 1), the number of parts before reach display is six. In other words, in the "Short" mode, which is likely to be selected when the result is a jackpot, the number of parts in which the first special effect can be executed is one more than in the "Long" mode. Therefore, it is easier to secure an opportunity to perform the first special effect when "short" is selected as the required time than when "long" is selected.

When the ready-to-win display is executed in the normal production mode, the variable display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is set higher is set so that the time required for the ready-to-win display is longer. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned table for selecting the time required for displaying the reach, the time required for displaying the reach is set so that the time required for displaying the reach is shorter in a game round that corresponds to a jackpot result than in a game round that corresponds to a losing result. It has an easy configuration. In other words, in the game round in which Super Reach D is executed, the number of parts before shifting to the reach display is likely to be larger in the case of a jackpot result than in the case of a miss result.

In the special performance mode, the degree of freedom in allocating the first special performance and the second special performance can be increased by increasing the number of parts before shifting to the reach display. This makes it easy to increase the number of continuous fluctuations until the transition to the ready-to-reach display, and the effect of improving the attention to the game by the performance in the special performance mode can be more suitably exhibited.

<Third embodiment>
In the special effect mode shown in the second embodiment, the time required for the ready-to-reach display is determined based on the variable display time information and the validity information from the main control device 162. In this embodiment, the configuration related to determining the required time is partially different from the second embodiment.

Specifically, when determining the time required for the reach display in the special effect mode of this embodiment, in addition to the variable display time information and win/fail information from the main controller 162, continuous results from the previous game round are used. And the above upper limit for the relevant game round is referred to. In other words, in determining the time required to display the reach, the continuous results from the previous game round and the set upper limit are taken into consideration. In other words, the reach is displayed based on these after the continuous results have been specified and the upper limit has been set. The configuration is such that the required time is determined.

More specifically, the required time selection table for reach display stored in the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 includes variable display time information, win/fail information, consecutive results from the previous game round, and the above upper limit for the game round. The information is stored in association with various conditions. The required time for reach display is determined from among "short", "middle", and "long" by referring to the one corresponding to the current condition from among these required time selection tables. In addition, for "Short", the number of parts that can perform the first special effect is one more than for "Middle", and for "Middle", the number of parts that can perform the second special effect is one more than for "Long". It is configured to increase the number of

For example, even if you want to earn the number of consecutive fluctuations following the reach display in the game round, if the number of parts is halfway, it may be difficult to earn the number of consecutive fluctuations. Specifically, if the required time is set to "middle", and the number of parts in the first section excluding the part for the second special effect (second section) before shifting to reach display becomes "7", By applying the first special effect to all parts of the first section, the number of consecutive fluctuations following the reach display becomes "7", which exceeds the upper limit of the number of consecutive fluctuations, which is "6". Although such inconvenience can be avoided by setting the second special effect in the first section, the number of continuous fluctuations following the reach display becomes extremely small. In the required time selection table for reach display in this embodiment, in such a case, in order to intentionally lengthen the time required for reach display by one part, that is, to intentionally reduce the number of parts in the first section by one, " The configuration is such that "Long" is easily selected. More specifically, the selection probability increases in the order of "middle" < "short" < "long".

With the configuration described in detail above, the number of consecutive fluctuations will be suppressed from becoming extremely small in the game round corresponding to the winning super reach D, and the number of consecutive fluctuations will be extremely large in the game round corresponding to the losing super reach D. can be suppressed. Therefore, the technical idea shown in the second embodiment, that the number of continuous fluctuations can be set in a manner suitable for the situation, can be more suitably realized.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when determining the performance pattern in the special performance mode, the performance pattern in the previous game round (specifically, the above-mentioned consecutive results) is taken into consideration. The present embodiment differs in structure from the first embodiment in that, when determining a performance pattern, the performance pattern in a game round subsequent to the current game round is taken into account. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52 and the timing chart of FIG. 53, a configuration related to determining a performance pattern in this embodiment will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, the main configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so the description of these common configurations will be omitted.

In the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, a cooperation setting process is executed as part of the effect determination process for the special effect mode (more specifically, the first setting process). The cooperation setting process is a process that is executed when the current game round is a game round that supports complete loss and the subsequent pending information has already been stored at the start of the game round, and is performed in step S1803, This is a process executed before the determination process of S1804, S1806, and S1807.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the cooperation setting process, first in step S2001 it is determined whether the next game round corresponds to the reach display. As already explained, the hold command sent from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 140 includes variable display time information, validity information, etc., and the notification/effect control device 140 processes this information. Based on this, it is determined whether the next game round is compatible with the reach display. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the next game round corresponds to a complete loss, the present cooperation setting process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, details of the effect pattern for the next game round are confirmed in step S2002. Specifically, the number of parts (the number of parts in the first section) until the transition to reach display in the next game round is calculated. In the following step S2003, the number of parts constituting the first section of the next game round is set to the practical upper limit (i.e., "6" if it corresponds to a jackpot result, and "6" if it corresponds to a miss result). is less than "5"). If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the present cooperation setting process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process advances to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined by lottery whether or not the relevant game round and the next game round can be linked. If the cooperation with the next game round is not to be performed, a negative determination is made in step S2005, and the present cooperation setting process is ended. When linking with the next game round, an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, and the process advances to step S2006.

In step S2006, an upper limit for the number of consecutive times over multiple game rounds is set. Thereafter, in step S2007, a special pattern table to be referred to in the current game round and the next game round is selected, and the present cooperation setting process is ended. In the determination processing of steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, if a special pattern table is selected in step S2007, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the special pattern table, and if the selection is not made, the effect pattern is determined. In the process similar to the first embodiment, a performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected special pattern table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 53, an example of a performance pattern when cooperation occurs will be illustrated. At timing tc1 during the confirmation display, a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, and the number of stored hold information increases from "1" to "2". When the game round starts at timing tc2, the variable display of the symbols on the upper operating port display section of the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 253 are started.

This game round corresponds to a complete loss, and the next game round corresponds to a jackpot. Regarding the next game round, the variable display time is 22 seconds, and the number of parts is "3" in the time excluding the reach display and the branch performance immediately before it (first section). Therefore, the number of times the first specific performance can be executed in the first section of the next game is "3", that is, if continuous fluctuation is performed in the next game alone, the reach display (branching effect) is included. The maximum number of consecutive fluctuations is 3. For the next game, it corresponds to the winning result, and the actual upper limit of the number of continuous fluctuations is "6", so the number of parts in the first section is insufficient to perform the continuous fluctuations for this upper limit. There is.

When starting a game round at timing tc2, it is determined by lottery whether or not to cooperate with the next game round. In the example of FIG. 54, a case where the lottery is won is illustrated. In the game round started at the timing tc2, the first special performance is executed once at the beginning, and the second special performance is executed at the subsequent timing tc3. Thereafter, in the latter half of the game, the first special performance is executed twice in succession. The first special performance to be executed last will end after the final display of the pattern on the upper operating mouth display section and the pattern on the pattern display device 253 is started at timing tc5.

When the next game round starts at timing tc6 immediately after the end of the first special performance, the variable display of symbols on the actuating opening display section and the variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 253 are started again. At the beginning of the next game round, the first special performance is executed three times, and the number of consecutive first special performances becomes five times, spanning from the previous game round to the next game round. Then, by starting the second special performance as a branch performance at the timing of tc7, the number of consecutive fluctuations including the second special performance becomes "5", and the display shifts to the ready-to-reach display at the timing of tc8. The next game round corresponds to the jackpot result, and at the timing of tc9, the stop display (confirmed display) of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is started on the actuating opening display section, and the jackpot is announced on the symbol display device 253. Stop display (confirmed display) of the symbol combination corresponding to the result will be started.

In this way, if the configuration is such that the outline of the performance pattern of the next game round is taken into consideration when determining the performance pattern of the previous game round, it becomes possible to relax the restrictions related to the number of continuous fluctuations. If it becomes possible to earn the number of consecutive fluctuations in the next game round (one game round) alone, the number of consecutive fluctuations can be appropriately set depending on the win/fail result and the like.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, by executing the same performance as the time-saving performance mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode in the special performance mode in the low-frequency support mode, the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is created. The structure is designed to suppress the monotony of the game. As already explained, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and fixed display time are shorter than in the low-frequency support mode, and the game progresses faster. In order to make it appear as if the special production mode suddenly shifted to the time-saving production mode during the low-frequency support mode, it is important to make the production in the special production mode and the production in the time-saving production mode similar. . Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment, there is a technical problem in diverting the videos used in the special production mode to the normal production mode, in order to reduce the difference in appearance between the productions in both production modes. it makes sense.

However, between the time-saving performance mode and the special performance mode, due to the difference in the prerequisite gaming conditions, the diversion of the performance may cause a slight sense of discomfort in the appearance. The cause of this discomfort will be supplementarily explained below with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. In addition, in FIG. 54, Ta is the time related to the symbol display for the operating port display section of the main display unit, and Ta is the time related to the symbol display for the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (specifically, the variable display area ME and the reduced display area SE). is distinguished as Tb.

When the normal production mode is set in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode, the stop display time (determined display time) Ta1 of the symbol on the actuation opening display section of the main display unit 87 and the symbol display device 253 The final stop display time (determined display time) Tb1 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) coincides with the stop display start timing of the symbol on the actuation opening display section and the display screen 253a (variable display area ME). The final stop display start timing of the symbol coincides with the timing at which the symbol stops displaying. In other words, the stop display of the picture and the stop display of the picture are synchronized.

When the time-saving production mode is set in the normal gaming state that supports the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time and fixed display time of the symbols and symbols in each game are shortened compared to the low-frequency support mode. However, as in the normal production mode, the stop display time (determined display time) Ta2 of the symbol on the actuation port display section of the main display unit 87 and the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (reduced display area SE) The final stop display time (determined display time) Tb2 of the symbol coincides with the symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb2, and the symbol stop display start timing on the actuation opening display section and the symbol final stop display start timing on the symbol display device 253 match. In other words, the stop display of the symbol and the stop display of the symbol are synchronized.

On the other hand, if the special effect mode is set in the normal gaming state that supports the low-frequency support mode, the stop display time (determined display time) Ta3 of the symbol on the actuation port display section of the main display unit 87 The final stop display time (determined display time) Tb3 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 coincides with the stop display start timing of the symbol in the actuating mouth display section and the symbol display device 253. Although the final stop display start timing of the symbol matches, the temporary stop display time Tb4 of the symbol on the symbol display device 253 matches the fixed display time Ta2, Tb2 of the symbol and symbol in the time-saving production mode. , is shorter than the fixed display times Ta3 and Tb3 of the symbols and symbols in the special performance mode.

Therefore, in the special performance mode, under the situation where the first special performance is repeated while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the display on the symbol display device 253 is the same as the display in the time-saving performance mode, and the display content on the symbol display device 253 is It is difficult to identify the difference between the time-saving production mode and the special production mode just by looking at them. Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb4 when performing a temporary stop display is shorter than the final display times Ta3 and Tb3, so when the final stop display is performed, the progress is slightly longer than when it is temporarily stopped. That will happen. In the first embodiment, as a countermeasure to this, the time for displaying the video using character CP1 is set to 2 seconds, and when the video display is executed at the end of a game round, it overlaps with the fixed display time. With this configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discomfort is suppressed. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to further reduce such a sense of harmony.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the fixed display time of a symbol in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is the same length as the fixed display time (1 sec) of a symbol in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. It is set to be the same. In other words, the configuration is such that there is no difference in stop display time between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. In the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the stop display of the symbols and the stop display of the symbols are synchronized as in the first embodiment. In the normal game state that supports low-frequency support mode, the stop display of symbols and the stop display of symbols are synchronized during special production mode, and the stop display of symbols and stop display of symbols are partially asynchronous during normal production mode. It is configured so that. In detail, during the normal production mode, if a predetermined condition is met, the symbol is displayed on standby (temporarily stopped display) on the active line of the variable display area ME, and a predetermined standby time (in this implementation) is displayed from the start of the standby display. In the configuration shown in FIG. 1, the display transitions to the final display at the timing when 1 sec) has elapsed.

In the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, the standby display control process, which is the process for the above-mentioned standby display, is executed as part of the display control process (regular process). The configuration regarding the standby display will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. 55(a) is a flowchart showing the standby display control process executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, FIG. 55(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the standby display, and FIG. 56 is the standby display FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

(Standby display control processing)
As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the standby control process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether re-variation display is being performed. In this embodiment, in a part of the game round corresponding to a jackpot result, some symbol combinations are changed again from the standby display state corresponding to a winning result, and when the symbol combination is confirmed to be displayed, the active line is displayed. A display (re-variation display) may be executed in which the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed above is switched to a symbol combination that corresponds to the jackpot result. In step S2101, it is determined whether this re-fluctuation display is being performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not standby display is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process advances to step S2103, and it is determined whether or not it is time to start standby display. In this embodiment, the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140 determines whether or not to perform standby display, and the information is transmitted to the display control device 410. The MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 determines whether or not the game round to be started is compatible with the ready-to-reach display, and if it is compatible with the ready-to-reach display, a standby display is set. In addition, if it corresponds to a complete failure, it is determined whether or not a standby display is possible based on the number of subsequent hold information. Specifically, if the number of subsequent hold information is less than a predetermined number (two in this embodiment), it is determined that a standby display is to be performed, and if the number has reached a predetermined number, a wait display is performed. It is determined that the display is not performed. In other words, if the variable display time is significantly shortened due to the number of subsequent hold information reaching a predetermined number, standby display is avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the standby display control process is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, a standby display start process is executed in step S2104, and then this standby display control process is ended. In the standby display control process, the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line, and the temporarily stopped and displayed symbol group is swung in the scrolling direction on the active line.

Returning to the explanation of step S2102, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if the standby display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2105.In step S2105, whether the current game round is a game round related to the re-fluctuation display or not. Determine whether or not. As described above, in the present embodiment, the standby display → re-variation display is executed in a part of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process advances to step S2106.

In step S2106, it is determined whether it is the timing to start re-fluctuation display. That is, it is determined whether the timing is immediately before final display. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the standby display control process is directly ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, a re-fluctuation display start process is executed in step S2106, and then the main standby display control process is ended. In the re-fluctuation display start process, scrolling display of some symbol rows is restarted.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, and if it is determined that the game round is not compatible with the re-variation display, the process advances to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the fluctuation display time for the current game round has elapsed (the timing at which the fluctuation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process advances to step S2109, and after executing the final stop display process, the main standby display control process ends. In the final stop display process when not going through the re-fluctuation display, the symbol combinations that are on standby display (swinging) on the active line are stopped as they are, and the symbol combinations that correspond to the miss result are displayed as the final stop display ( Confirm display).

Returning to the explanation of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is determined that the re-variation display is in progress, the process advances to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the fluctuation display time for the current game round has elapsed (the timing at which the fluctuation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is directly ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process advances to step S2109, and after executing the final stop display process, the main standby display control process ends. In the final stop display process when going through the re-fluctuation display, the symbol combination that corresponds to the jackpot result is stopped on the active line of the symbols being scrolled, and the symbol combination is displayed as the final stop display (confirmed display). ).

Next, symbol display when a standby display occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56(a) illustrates the case where the reach display is used, and FIG. 56(b) illustrates the case where the reach display is not used.

In FIG. 56(a), after a reach display, a standby display is performed using a symbol combination corresponding to a miss result. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the active line. If the current game round corresponds to a winning result, the swinging of all symbols will be canceled at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the standby display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result will be displayed. The final stop display (determined display) will be displayed on the effective line. This clearly indicates to the player that the result has been a loss.

On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the above-mentioned swing will be canceled when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the standby display, and the middle symbol row will scroll and become valid. The symbol combinations displayed on the line are changed from those corresponding to a winning result to those corresponding to a jackpot result. This clearly indicates to the player that a jackpot has been achieved.

In addition, in the game round that corresponds to the hit reach display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result may be displayed as the final stop display (confirmed display) without going through the standby display, but the proportion is the same as the standby display → replay. The structure is such that there are more symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result after the fluctuating display than in the case where the symbol combinations are displayed at the final stop.

In FIG. 56(b), a standby display is performed using a symbol combination corresponding to a miss result without going through a reach display. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the active line. If the current game round corresponds to a winning result, the swinging of all symbols will be canceled at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the standby display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result will be displayed. The final stop display (determined display) will be displayed on the effective line. This clearly indicates to the player that the result has been a loss.

On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the above-mentioned rocking will be canceled at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the standby display, and some symbol rows (for example, the top The symbol combination (symbol row) is scrolled and the symbol combination displayed on the active line is changed from one corresponding to a winning result to one corresponding to a jackpot result. This clearly indicates to the player that a jackpot has been achieved.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 57. In addition, in FIG. 57, similarly to FIG. 54, the time related to the symbol display is Ta for the display section for the operating port of the main display unit, and the time related to the symbol display of the symbol display device 253 (specifically, the variable display area ME, the reduced display area SE) is The time related to symbol display is distinguished as Tb.

When the time-saving production mode is set in the normal gaming state that supports the high-frequency support mode, as shown in the center of FIG. Display time) Ta6 and the final stop display time (determined display time) Tb6 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 match, and the stop display start timing of the symbol on the actuating mouth display section coincides with the symbol final stop display time (determined display time) Tb6. The final stop display start timing of the symbols on the symbol display device 253 coincides. In other words, the stop display of the picture and the stop display of the picture are synchronized.

When the special effect mode is set in the normal gaming state that supports the low-frequency support mode, as shown on the right side of FIG. Display time) Ta7 matches the final stop display time (determined display time) Tb7 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the symbol display device 253, and the stop display start timing of the symbol on the actuating mouth display section coincides with the symbol final stop display time (fixed display time) Tb7. The final stop display start timing of the symbols on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) coincides with the timing. In other words, the stop display of the symbol and the stop display of the symbol are synchronized.

On the other hand, when the normal production mode is set in the normal gaming state that supports the low-frequency support mode, the stop display time (determined display time) Ta5 of the symbol on the actuation port display section of the main display unit 87 is The final stop display time (determined display time) Tb5 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 coincides with the stop display start timing of the symbol in the actuating mouth display section and the symbol display device 253. Although the final stop display start timing of the symbol matches, the total stop display time TbX (2 sec), which takes into account the standby display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 253, is longer than the final display time Ta5, Tb5 (1 sec). It has become. That is, in the symbol display device 253, the symbol is displayed in standby mode prior to the final display, and the stop display time is extended by the standby display. By extending the stop display time by the standby display, it becomes possible to secure a certain amount of stop display time for the symbols. This is a preferable configuration for encouraging players to understand the game results.

Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb8 matches the final display times Ta7 and Tb7. Therefore, even if a game round is composed of multiple parts due to the first special effect, etc., it is possible to prevent the boundaries between game rounds from becoming noticeable due to the difference between the temporary stop display time and the final stop display time. . In this way, if we make good use of the existing configuration, we can prevent the complexity of the configuration and avoid the occurrence of discomfort when performing a performance similar to that in the time-saving performance mode in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode. can be suitably suppressed. Furthermore, while it is not necessary to switch the fixed display time according to the gaming state, it is possible to stop display the symbols in a preferable manner according to the gaming state, so it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the sharpness of the game progress. .

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the transition to the special effect mode is triggered when the number of games executed in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode reaches a preset number of times. The timing of transition to the special effect mode may be changed as follows. That is, when a predetermined time condition is met (for example, when the time elapsed in the normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined time or a predetermined time), the special effect mode is entered. It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select a performance mode, and when a special performance mode is designated by the selection operation, the game shifts to the special performance mode. It is also possible to use these various transition triggers together.

(2) A plurality of types of first special effects shown in each of the above embodiments may be provided. Specifically, as the first special performance, a first special performance A and a first special performance B with different jackpot expectations are provided, and when a reach display that will result in a jackpot is executed, a first special performance that is a precursor to the jackpot result is provided. The configuration is such that the first special performance B is easily set as the special performance, and the first special performance A is easily set as the first special performance when a reach display that results in a miss is executed or when a reach display is not executed. It is also possible to do this. For example, regarding the girl character CP1 displayed in the first special effect, in the first special effect A, the broom of the girl character CP1 is white, and in the first special effect B, the broom of the girl character CP1 is white. It is a good idea to differentiate by making the color red.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the allocation of the first special performance and the second special performance in the subsequent game round is determined in consideration of the number of continuous fluctuations across the game rounds. It is not limited. The special pattern table can be simplified by regulating the number of consecutive fluctuations to be "0" at the end of a game round and eliminating the influence on subsequent game rounds. However, if you try to complete the continuous fluctuation in each game in a situation where there is a lot of pending information stored (in a situation where the time-saving function plays a large role), there will be a deviation from the time-saving production mode where the game progresses at a good tempo. becomes larger. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which whether or not the above-mentioned restriction is allowed is determined depending on the number of subsequent reservation information. For example, in a configuration where the variable display time is greatly shortened when the number of stored hold information is 2 or more, the above restriction is applied when the number of stored hold information is less than 2. , "2" or more, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the above regulation is not performed.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when a command corresponding to an out-of-reach is received during the special effect mode, the out-of-reach display is executed, and the first special effect is executed at a time before the transition to the out-of-reach display. Although the configuration is repeated, it is not limited to this. For example, when a command corresponding to an out-of-reach is received during the special performance mode, it may be configured such that the notification/performance control device 140 determines whether or not to perform a reach-to-reach display. In the case where a missed reach is not performed, the number of executions of the first special performance can be increased by making the entire section the target of division.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, a configuration in which the reach display is executed only once during one game round has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. This does not negate a configuration in which the reach display is executed multiple times during one game. In such a configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which an out-of-reach result is notified at least for the ready-to-reach display performed before the final ready-to-reach display.

(5) The execution time of the second special performance shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to be longer than the execution time of the first special performance. The length is optional. For example, the length may be the same as the execution time of the first special effect, or it may be shorter than the execution time of the first special effect.

Furthermore, although the third special performance shown in each of the above embodiments is configured such that its execution time is the same as the execution time of the first special performance, it is important to note how long the execution time of the third special performance is. It is up to you whether you choose to do so. For example, the execution time may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first special effect. However, in view of the fact that the second special performance and the third special performance function as stoppers that terminate the series of the first special performance, it is preferable that the execution times of the second special performance and the third special performance are different.

In addition, when deciding the performance pattern by the notification/performance control device 140, it is possible to smooth the allocation of the first to third special performances, and to alleviate the occurrence of excess or deficiency with the variable display time. Now, there is technical significance in making the execution time of the second special performance and the third special performance an integral multiple of the execution time of the first special performance, which is set as the reference time.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the arrangement of the first to third special effects is determined at the start of variation, but after setting all the first special effects, some parts are transferred to the second special effect. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the second special performance and the third special performance are replaced at the start of the performance and the third special performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the performance pattern until the start of the second special performance or the third special performance. For example, by making it possible to change the performance pattern by taking into account subsequent pending information newly added after the start of the main game round, it is possible to strengthen the cooperation between the previous and subsequent game rounds.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, in the first special performance in the special performance mode, the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is temporarily stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to temporarily stop and display a re-fluctuation symbol combination (temporarily stopped symbol combination) similarly to the normal production mode. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which either the re-fluctuation symbol combination or the completely missed symbol combination is stopped and displayed depending on the game result or the like.

Even if the re-fluctuation symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first special performance in the special performance mode, when the second special performance and the third special performance are executed in the middle of the game, It is preferable to differentiate the second special performance and the third special performance from the first special performance by temporarily stopping and displaying a completely missed symbol combination.

(8) In each of the embodiments described above, various special pattern tables are configured so that the second special effects do not occur consecutively, for the purpose of increasing the chances of the first special effects occurring. It is also possible to change this and configure various special pattern tables so that the second special effects can occur consecutively. Similarly, it is also possible to configure various special pattern tables so that the third special effects can occur consecutively. Further, it is also possible to configure various special pattern tables so that the second special effect and the third special effect can occur successively. Note that this does not negate the combination of these patterns.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit of the first consecutive number of times in the special effect mode is set in relation to the pseudo continuous fluctuation display executed in the normal effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. A configuration may also be adopted in which the upper limit is set regardless of the pseudo continuous fluctuation display. Further, the upper limit does not need to be a variable parameter, but can also be a fixed parameter.

By the way, in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, we have given an example where a super reach or higher is confirmed when the number of consecutive times becomes 4, and a jackpot is confirmed when the number of consecutive times becomes 6, but in this way, depending on the number of consecutive times, It is optional whether or not to make the variable display mode and game results explicit. Furthermore, the maximum number of consecutive times in the pseudo-continuous variation display may also be changed arbitrarily.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the effect display is performed as part of the preview performance that spans the game rounds during the time-saving performance mode, and the effect display is also performed in the special performance mode. It is also possible to omit it.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, regarding the effect display in the special production mode, the number of consecutive fluctuations and the effect level may deviate, and the two do not necessarily match. However, this has been changed, and the number of consecutive fluctuations It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect level and the effect level are made to match.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the case of transitioning from the special performance mode to the normal performance mode via the third special performance has been exemplified, but it is also possible to provide a similar function to the second special performance. . As a result, it is possible to increase variations in the effect patterns defined by the ninth special pattern table to the twelfth special pattern table, and increase the chances of executing the first special effect.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the execution time of the first special effect is one type (2 seconds), but a plurality of execution times of the first special effect may be provided. Even in this case, it is preferable to take into account the execution time of the game in the high-frequency support mode when setting the execution time. For example, in the first embodiment, the variable display time when no reach occurs is set to 1 sec when the number of reservations is 2 to 4, and 2 seconds when the number of reservations is 1. ing. In order to increase the execution time of the first special effect, considering the next shortest variable display time 2 seconds + fixed display time 1 second, the execution time of the first special effect to be added is 3 seconds (variable display time 2 seconds + temporary stop display time 1 second) It is preferable that

(14) In each of the above embodiments, in the time-saving production mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the special production mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the symbols are displayed in the reduced display area SE on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the symbols are displayed in the variable display area ME in the same way as in the normal performance mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the number of parts (the number of times the first special effect can be executed) is specified by arithmetic processing that divides the variable display time or the section before shifting to the reach display by the reference time, and based on the specified result. Although the configuration is such that the first to third special effects are distributed, it is also possible to omit the calculation process by storing special pattern tables corresponding to various variable display times. However, when special pattern tables are provided corresponding to various variable display times, it is difficult to make the special pattern tables common, and the number tends to increase, compared to when special pattern tables are provided depending on the number of parts. In particular, when the execution time of reach display is different even if the variable display time is the same (see, for example, the second embodiment), such inconvenience becomes noticeable. In this way, storing special pattern tables according to the number of parts has a technical significance in that it can contribute to reducing the amount of information stored in the notification/performance control device 140.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the fixed display time in the low-frequency support mode was exemplified as being shorter than the fixed display time in the high-frequency support mode, but the fixed display time in each mode The relationship is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to make the fixed display time in the low-frequency support mode and the fixed display time in the high-frequency support mode the same.

(17) In the second embodiment described above, when Super Reach D is executed in the special effect mode, a configuration is exemplified in which multiple times are provided for displaying a reach, but regarding the time required for displaying a reach is not limited to short/long, but is arbitrary. For example, it may be three (short/middle/long), or it may be four or more.

In addition, for the game round in which Super Reach D is executed, when comparing the same variable display time, we have configured multiple timings from the start of the game round to the transition to the reach display, but regarding the difference in these timings. does not necessarily have to be the same length as the above reference time. However, in order to create a difference in the number of consecutive fluctuations (continuous number) performed before the reach display by using the difference in timing to secure the execution time of the first predetermined effect, It is preferable that the execution time (reference time) of the predetermined performance be made longer. Note that, similarly to the second embodiment, if this difference is set to be an integral multiple of the reference time, the smoothness of the flow of the performance will be impaired due to the difference in the number of consecutive fluctuations. can be suitably suppressed.

(18) In the third embodiment, the timing of transition to the reach display in the next game round is determined in consideration of the performance pattern of the previous game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not to consider the effect pattern of the previous game round depending on the interval time from the previous game round. For example, if the next game round starts immediately after the previous game round ends (that is, if the pending information for the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round), then the previous game round While considering the performance pattern of If there is no such effect), it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the performance pattern of the previous game round is not taken into consideration. Note that the criteria for determining consideration/non-consideration is not limited to interval period=0. The interval period used as the determination criterion may be arbitrarily changed as long as the player recognizes that the previous game round and the subsequent game round are being played consecutively.

(19) In the fifth embodiment, the standby display is performed by swinging the symbols in the scrolling direction, but at least the symbol is maintained on the active line and may change again. It is sufficient that it can be suggested, and the specific form of the standby display is arbitrary. For example, the design may be configured to repeatedly expand/reduce on the active line, the transparency of the pattern may repeatedly change from low to high, or the design or the effects associated with the design may blink. (Flash) may also be used.

(20) In the time-saving production mode, the remaining number of games that will be maintained in the high-frequency support mode is basically hidden, and in the special production mode, the remaining number of games that will be maintained in the special production mode is also hidden. Although this is clearly stated, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which information corresponding to the remaining number of times is clearly displayed in each production mode. For example, a counter indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed on the display screen 253a. In the time-saving effect mode, the value of this counter is updated (for example, subtracted) according to the number of games played, and in the special effect mode, the value of this counter is set to 1st special effect, 2nd special effect (no development of reach display), 3rd special effect, etc. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the value of the counter is updated (for example, subtracted) each time various effects such as special effects are executed. Thereby, the effect of making the special performance mode resemble the time-saving performance mode can be more suitably exhibited.

In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, when the decision whether to end the special effect mode is determined by lottery, after the counter reaches "0", for example, when the special effect mode ends is determined. It is preferable to display a message (for example, a message such as "WARNING") indicating that the situation is normal.

It is also possible to configure a configuration in which the special effect mode ends when the counter value becomes "0" and the above-mentioned delay does not occur, but in this case, the last time in the special effect mode I would like to see some improvement in the performance patterns during game rounds. For example, an event may occur in which the value of the counter becomes "0" during a game round, that is, an event such as a transition to normal production mode during a game round, but in such a case, the counter value becomes "0". It is preferable that the part up to this point be made up of first to third special effects compatible with the special performance mode, and the part after reaching "0" be made up of a performance compatible with the normal performance mode.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the minimum number of times the high-frequency support mode can be continued is 10 times, but the minimum number of times the high-frequency support mode can be continued is pseudo-varied in one game (first special effect to third special effect). This is arbitrary as long as it is set to be greater than the maximum number of times that a special performance, etc.) can be executed. In each of the above embodiments, in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the longest variable display time in a game round in which no reach occurs is 17 seconds. In this variation display time, the number of parts is "9", and when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is set to "3", the maximum number of times the pseudo variation is executed is 7 times. On the other hand, the longest variable display time in a game round in which a reach occurs is 28 seconds. With this variable display time, the number of remaining parts when considering the reach display time and branching effect time is "6", and if the upper limit of the consecutive number of times is set to "6", the maximum number of times the pseudo variation can be executed is 6 times. becomes. In such a case, considering the former, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned minimum number of continuations to 8 or more times. In accordance with this, the minimum number of consecutive playbacks when transitioning to the special performance mode in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode may also be set to 8 or more times.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, a lower limit is set for the number of times the special effect mode can be continued (the number of times pseudo fluctuations are executed), and after this lower limit is reached, a lottery is used to decide whether or not to continue the special effect mode. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of continuations of the special effect mode (the number of times pseudo fluctuations are executed) matches the candidate number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (determined display) after reaching the reach display in each game round that results in a jackpot result, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display in a part of the game round that results in the jackpot result. In such a configuration, in the game round that results in a jackpot result, either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped (determined display) after going through the reach display, or the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed without going through the reach display. The configuration may be such that the decision as to whether to stop display (confirm display) is entrusted to the notification/effect control device 140. For example, when a game session that results in a jackpot is executed during the special effect mode, the number of times the first special effect is executed in the game session executed before the corresponding game session (including at least the immediately preceding game session) ( In other words, it is determined whether or not to perform the reach display by taking into consideration the number of consecutive first special performances before the relevant game round, and when it is decided to perform the reach display, the performance pattern in the relevant game round, i.e. The number of executions of the first special performance may be determined by taking into account the number of executions of the first special performance in the previous game round (that is, the number of consecutive times the first special performance was performed before the relevant game round).

(24) In a configuration in which the first special effect is continued across the game rounds by cooperation between the previous game round and the subsequent game round, the first special effect is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined avoidance condition during the interval between both game rounds. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that avoids cooperation between both game rounds, for example, a configuration in which the performance pattern of the previous game round is not considered when determining the performance pattern of the later game round. The predetermined avoidance conditions include, for example, the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the control mode of the gaming machine is switched to a power saving mode that consumes less power than usual, and the symbol display device 253 shifts to a demonstration display. This includes at least one of the following: or the display of a menu for adjusting the volume or the like based on the player's operations. By configuring the system so that the performance pattern of the previous game round is not considered when the game is substantially interrupted, the degree of freedom in setting the performance pattern for the subsequent game round can be suitably improved.

(25) When the first special performance is repeated with a second special performance or a third special performance in between, the number of consecutive first special performances before the second special performance or third special performance, and the number of consecutive times after the second special performance or the third special performance. 1. A correlation may be given to the number of consecutive special effects. For example, when determining the consecutive number of first special performances in a game round that corresponds to a jackpot result, the proportion of performance patterns that match the previous number of consecutive performances is higher than the proportion of performance patterns that do not match. A performance pattern in which a difference is set so that the ratio increases, and when determining the consecutive number of first special performances in a game round that does not correspond to a jackpot result, the performance pattern is made to match the previous consecutive number of times. It is also possible to provide a difference so that the ratio is lower. In the case of such a configuration, each of the above differences is increased so that when the later consecutive number and the previous consecutive number match, the jackpot result is confirmed or the expectation of a jackpot result is high. good.

(26) In the special performance mode, the performance pattern for the game round is determined at the start of the game round, but if multiple pieces of pending information are stored, the performance for each game round related to the held information It is also possible to have a configuration in which patterns are determined all at once. For example, when pending information is newly stored in the special performance mode, the performance pattern for each game round related to the pending information and the previously stored pending information may be determined collectively. . If the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which a special performance is executed over a plurality of game rounds as shown in each of the above embodiments, it is possible to contribute to optimization of the performance pattern.

(27) In a configuration where the expectation of a jackpot result increases as the number of consecutive first special effects increases, it is preferable to provide a branching effect that determines whether or not the first special effect continues. That is, a performance pattern in which the number of consecutive first special performances is inherited with a branch performance in between and a performance pattern in which the number of consecutive times of the first special performance is not inherited with a branch performance in between may be provided. With such a configuration, when the first special performance is repeated, the first special performance can be divided into two parts by intervening a branching performance, so even if the first special performance is repeated, the first special performance can be divided into two parts. It is possible to suitably prevent the number of consecutive times from increasing excessively.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped) before the final display as part of the display effect, but for example, the game corresponding to the jackpot result In a part of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, the symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed in the main game round) is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped) before the symbol combination is displayed as confirmed. It is also possible. For example, in some cases where a jackpot result is announced through multiple first special effects → second special effects → third special effects, at least one of the plurality of first special effects corresponds to the jackpot result. It may also be configured to stop display (temporarily stop or temporarily stop) the symbol combinations (for example, the symbol combinations that are confirmed and displayed in this game round).

(29) If information such as success or failure in a subsequent game round is specified before the subsequent game round starts, the final stop will be made at the game round executed before the relevant subsequent game round. The symbol combination (the symbol combination to be confirmed and displayed) may be determined in consideration of the above-mentioned specific result. For example, if the subsequent game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the symbol combination that is finally stopped in the previous game round (corresponding to a losing result) may be changed to a jackpot result in the subsequent game round. It is best to use a design combination that suggests or makes clear the following.

In addition, as shown in the above modification (26), when determining the production pattern of multiple game rounds at once, information such as the validity of the last game run among the multiple game rounds is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbol combinations, etc. of the game round to be executed before that (for example, the symbol combinations that are finally stopped and the symbol combinations that are temporarily stopped) are taken into consideration.

(30) The number of times the ready-to-reach display is executed during one game round is arbitrary, and it is also possible to have a configuration in which the ready-to-reach display is executed a plurality of times. In this way, when executing the reach display multiple times during one game round, the timing of development to each reach display and the number of times the first special effect is executed before the development timing to each reach display can be adjusted by changing the number of times of the game round. It may be configured such that patterns are stored in a state corresponding to the display time (for example, stored as a performance pattern table) and one of these patterns is selected as the performance pattern. With such a configuration, while the performance function is strengthened by providing correspondence between the previous and next ready-to-reach displays, it is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessively large when determining the performance pattern due to this.

For example, as shown in the above modification example (17), short, middle, and long are set as the times during which the reach display is executed, and when the reach display execution times are different, the jackpot result depends on the length of time. It is also possible to change the degree of expectation. When such a configuration is combined with the configuration shown in this modified example, the expectation level for a jackpot result is changed by the combination of the first reach display and the second reach display, and the previous and next reach displays are linked. It would be good to strengthen it. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot result changes depending on how the length and type of the previous reach display and the length and type of the subsequent reach display are combined. For example, if the length of the first reach display is set to long, which has a relatively high expectation, and the length of the next reach display is set to short, which has a relatively low expectation, then other combinations It is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation level of a jackpot result is extremely high. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot result changes not only by the number of consecutive times of the first special effect but also by the relationship between reach displays executed multiple times, and the degree of attention to the game changes. Further improvement can be expected.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide one control device that integrates the functions of each of these control devices 140 and 410. .

(32) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball enters the machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that provides a player with benefits such as a payout of medals if a specific symbol or specific symbol combination is established on an active line that can be seen from a display window after the reels have stopped. Applicable.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
The following features group A are as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1, for example). Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games. It is.

Feature A1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determining means (main controller) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result (jackpot result) corresponding to granting a benefit to a player. (a function of executing processing such as winning/failure lottery on the MPU 402 of the device 162);
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means is a period determining means that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation for each game time (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). has
When the game rotation operation is being performed, a performance execution means that executes a performance in parallel with the game rotation operation (fluctuating display control processing is executed by the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) function),
As one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided,
The number of times the predetermined performance can be executed during a game round is specified based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance, and the number of times the predetermined performance can be performed during the game round is determined based on the identification result. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an execution number determining means (a function for determining a performance pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining the number of times the predetermined performance is executed.

According to feature A1, for example, the predetermined performance is repeated within the range possible during the corresponding game round. In gaming machines, the operating periods are generally set in various ways for reasons such as suppressing the monotony of the game. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, predetermined effects can be executed in accordance with various operation periods. Thereby, the effect of increasing the attention level to the game due to the predetermined performance can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes winning processing for the actuation opening) that acquires special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions. an acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main controller 162) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means; and special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A grant determination means (a function for executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines whether or not the bonus corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to granting the bonus to the player. The game reuse operation is defined as one game time in which the game reuse operation is ended by the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means after the game reuse operation is started. In a gaming machine equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game time control means is It has a period determining means (a function for executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that determines the operation period of the game recurring operation for each game round, and the game recurring operation is performed. It is equipped with a performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that executes the performance when the performance is executed by the performance execution means. A predetermined effect configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and the effect is based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an execution number determining means (a function for determining a performance pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining the number of times the predetermined performance is executed during a game round. It is also possible to do this.

Feature A2. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determining means (main controller) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result (jackpot result) corresponding to granting a benefit to a player. (a function of executing processing such as a winning lottery on the MPU 402 of the device 162);
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means is a period determining means that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation for each game time (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). has
When the game rotation operation is being performed, a performance execution means that executes a performance in parallel with the game rotation operation (fluctuating display control processing is executed by the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) function),
As one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided,
a number of times specifying means (notification and effect control device 140 function to calculate the number of parts using the MPU 442),
Execution number determining means (a function of setting a performance pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining the number of times the predetermined performance is executed during the game round based on the identification result by the number of times identification means; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A2, for example, the predetermined performance is repeated within the range possible during the corresponding game round. In gaming machines, the operating periods are generally set in various ways for reasons such as suppressing the monotony of the game. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, predetermined effects can be executed in accordance with various operation periods. Thereby, the effect of increasing the attention level to the game due to the predetermined performance can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A3. Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that the execution number determining means is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined performance based on the operation period, the performance execution period, and the determination result of the provision determination means. The gaming machine described in .

By determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the determination result by the provision determination means, it is possible to provide a relationship between the determination result and the number of executions. For example, by creating a difference in the number of executions between cases where the result is a grant correspondence result and cases where the result is not a grant correspondence result, it becomes possible to suggest the determination result by a predetermined effect. Thereby, the attention level improvement effect shown in feature A1 etc. can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A4. The execution number determining means includes:
Setting means (a function for setting the upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for setting the upper limit number of times (for example, the first consecutive number of times) based on the determination result by the provision determining means;
A limiting means for limiting the number of executions of the predetermined production so that the number of executions of the predetermined production does not exceed the upper limit number of times (a function for limiting the consecutive number of times in the MPU 442 of the notification/production control device 140); The gaming machine according to feature A3.

In a configuration in which the number of executions of a predetermined effect is determined according to the operation period as shown in feature A1 etc., the longer the operation period becomes, the more the number of times the predetermined effect is executed increases. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of executions becomes too strong like this, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the results of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times is set based on the result of the provision determination, and the number of execution times of the predetermined effect is determined within a range that does not exceed the upper limit number of times, then the predetermined effect is executed. Even if the possible number of executions is large, the actual number of executions can be limited by the limiting means so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. The performance execution means is configured to suggest the degree of expectation, which is the provision corresponding result, based on the number of executions when the predetermined performance is executed continuously;
The execution number determining means includes:
Setting means (a function for setting the upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for setting the upper limit number of times (for example, the first consecutive number of times) based on the determination result by the provision determining means;
a limiting means for limiting the number of times the predetermined performance is executed so that the number of consecutive executions of the predetermined performance does not exceed the upper limit number of times (a function for limiting the number of consecutive executions in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140); The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized by having the following.

In a configuration in which the number of executions of a predetermined effect is determined according to the operation period, as shown in feature A1, etc., the longer the operation period becomes, the more the number of times the predetermined effect is repeated increases. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of executions becomes too strong like this, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the results of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit is set based on the result of the provision determination, and the number of consecutive predetermined effects is determined within a range that does not exceed the upper limit, then the predetermined effect is executed. Even if the possible number of times is large, the number of consecutive times can be adjusted to be small by the limiting means, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, "~when the predetermined performance is executed continuously" means a case where the predetermined performance is executed again after the predetermined performance has ended, that is, when another performance (for example, a second predetermined performance described below) intervenes. This includes the case where the predetermined performance is executed continuously without any action.

Feature A6. The predetermined performance is a first predetermined performance,
As one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a second predetermined performance (for example, a second special performance or a third special performance) different from the first predetermined performance is provided,
The limiting means may limit the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed in succession by executing the second predetermined effect when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to limit.

According to this feature, by intervening the second predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect is limited so as not to exceed the upper limit number of times. In a configuration in which the degree of expectation of the result of granting is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, the degree of attention to the game can be improved by using the second predetermined effect to prevent the first predetermined effect from continuing. It is also possible to clearly inform the player that the series of first predetermined performances has ended.

Note that the second predetermined performance includes, for example, a reach performance and a branch performance that determines whether or not to develop into a reach performance.

Incidentally, it is also possible to apply the above-mentioned technical idea to the above feature A4. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature is "the predetermined performance is a first predetermined performance, and as one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a second predetermined performance (for example, a second predetermined performance) different from the first predetermined performance (for example, 2 special effects and a third special effect), and the limiting means executes the second predetermined effects when the number of times the first predetermined effects can be performed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to limit the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed.

Feature A7. The limiting means executes the first predetermined effect before the second predetermined effect by intervening the second predetermined effect when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a means for dividing into those that are executed and those that are executed later.

By configuring the first predetermined performance group to include the second predetermined performance, it is possible to prevent the number of executions of the first predetermined performance from becoming excessively small, and to prevent the number of consecutive performances from increasing.

Note that, as shown in feature A6 and feature A7, when executing the second predetermined effect during the period in which the first predetermined effect can be executed, for example, a part of the first predetermined effect group is executed by the second predetermined effect. It is recommended to use a replacement configuration.

Feature A8. In the case where the second predetermined effect is interposed, the limiting means is arranged such that the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is the same as the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect. a first aspect in which the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect is greater than the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect; and a second aspect in which the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect; and a second aspect in which the number of consecutive predetermined effects is less than the number of consecutive predetermined effects, and if the determination result of the grant determination is the grant corresponding result, the second predetermined performance is performed in the second manner rather than in the first aspect. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that effects are often interposed.

In the case where the first predetermined performance group is divided into the front and back by the second predetermined performance in the game round corresponding to the granting determination result, the first predetermined performance after the second predetermined performance is likely to be repeated many times. , it is possible to suitably heighten the expectations of the players in the process of notifying them of the award response results. If the number of consecutive first predetermined performances can be increased as much as possible (within the limits) in the part following the notification of the award response result, the attention of players will be increased toward the notification while diversifying the performances. You can encourage them to do so.

Feature A9. The limiting means is configured to intervene the second predetermined effect more often in the first aspect than in the second aspect when the determination result of the grant determination is not the grant corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

When dividing the first predetermined performance group into front and back by the second predetermined performance in a game round that does not correspond to the granting determination result, by configuring the first predetermined performance before the second predetermined performance to be more likely to occur in succession. , the effect shown in feature A8 above can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A9, wherein the execution period of the second predetermined effect is configured to be an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect.

As shown in feature A6 etc., when limiting the number of times (consecutive times) of the first predetermined effect using the second predetermined effect, as shown in this feature, the execution period of the second predetermined effect is limited to the first predetermined effect. By setting the execution period to an integral multiple (x1, 2, 3...), the following effects can be expected. In other words, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the intervention of the second predetermined effect affecting the first predetermined effect for which the execution period would otherwise have been secured and the first predetermined effect not being successfully executed. . Therefore, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the results specified in advance cannot be reused and the number of times specified or the presentation layout needs to be redone. This is preferable in order to facilitate the progress of the performance.

Feature A11. comprising a related information storage means (a continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/effect control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means,
The limiting means is configured such that when the performance in the game round before the current game round ends with the predetermined performance, the number of consecutive executions of the predetermined performance from the previous game round is set to the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A5 to A10, further comprising a special limiting means for limiting the number of executions of the predetermined performance so as not to exceed the number of times the predetermined effect is executed.

In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly executed during a game round, there is a possibility that the predetermined effect executed in a previous game round and the predetermined effect executed in a subsequent game round appear to be continuous. be. Therefore, if a predetermined effect is being executed at the end of the previous game round, by making sure that the consecutive number of times including this predetermined effect does not exceed the predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect will continue to exceed the limit. It is possible to suppress the appearance that This is preferable in order to reduce confusion among players.

Note that in combination with features A6 to A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature may be set as the "first predetermined effect."

Feature A12. The special restriction means sets the restriction when an interval period from the end of the predetermined effect in the previous game round until the start of the predetermined effect in the current game round does not exceed a reference period. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to play.

When predetermined effects are performed in the previous and subsequent game rounds, whether or not these predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined by whether or not the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game time and then the predetermined effects are performed in the next game time. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of the process. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which the above-mentioned restriction is performed when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, it becomes possible to suitably exhibit the effect shown in feature A11.

Feature A13. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
According to feature A11, the special restriction means is configured to perform the restriction when the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round. gaming machines.

When predetermined effects are performed in the previous and subsequent game rounds, whether or not these predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined by whether or not the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game time and then the predetermined effects are performed in the next game time. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of the process. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature A11 is achieved by implementing the above restriction when special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round. It becomes possible to make it perform suitably.

Feature A14. comprising a related information storage means (a continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/effect control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means,
The execution number determining means is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined performance in the current game round based on the specific result and the execution status of the predetermined performance in the game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

If it becomes possible to associate the predetermined effect executed in the current game round with the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round, the occurrence pattern of the predetermined effect will be different from the case where the predetermined effect is performed only in the current game round. It is possible to diversify the settings and improve the degree of freedom in setting predetermined effects. Using the predetermined performance in the previous game round in this way is advantageous in improving the attention level to the game through the predetermined performance.

Note that in combination with features A6 to A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature may be set as the "first predetermined effect."

Feature A15. The execution number determining means determines that an interval period from the end of the predetermined effect in the previous game round until the start of the predetermined effect in the current game round is a reference period (for example, the same time as the final display time: 2 seconds), the number of executions of the predetermined performance in the current game round is determined based on the specific result and the execution status of the predetermined performance in the game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature A14.

When predetermined effects are performed in the previous and subsequent game rounds, whether or not these predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined by whether or not the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game time and then the predetermined effects are performed in the next game time. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of the process. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the system to cooperate between game sessions when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect shown in feature A14.

Feature A16. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
When the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the end of the previous game round, the execution number determining means is configured to calculate the specific result and the predetermined number of execution times in the game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the gaming machine is configured to determine the number of executions of the predetermined performance in the current game round based on the execution status of the performance.

When predetermined effects are performed in the previous and subsequent game rounds, whether or not these predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined by whether or not the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game time and then the predetermined effects are performed in the next game time. It is likely to be influenced by the period until the start of the process. Therefore, as shown in feature A14, by creating a configuration in which the special information corresponding to the next game time is stored by the end of the previous game time, coordination between game times is achieved, as shown in feature A14. This makes it possible to suitably exhibit the effects that have been achieved.

Feature A17. Information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is subject to the attachment determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the attachment determination. provided with means for specifying the destination,
The number-of-executions determining means determines the number of times the predetermined performance is executed in the game round before the game round that is the target of identification by the destination specifying means, based on the identification result by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A16.

When repeating a predetermined performance in one game, it is assumed that restrictions regarding the number of times the predetermined performance is performed, the number of consecutive times, etc. become stronger. For example, even if you try to increase the number of executions of a predetermined effect when the game session that was previously specified corresponds to the granting result, it may not be possible to secure a sufficient number of executions depending on the operation period of the game session. It can occur. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when determining the number of executions of a predetermined performance in the game round (current game round) before the game round that was the target of earlier identification, the game that was the target of earlier identification By adopting a configuration that takes into account information that specifies the previous game, it is possible to realize cooperation between previous and subsequent game times, and prepare in advance for, for example, the lack of an operating period as described above.

Feature A18. The destination specifying means includes means for specifying the operation period of the game round related to the predetermined special information, and the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the game round related to the predetermined special information based on the operation period. and a means of identifying the
The performance execution means executes the predetermined performance at least at the end of the current game round when the number of times the predetermined performance can be performed in the game round related to the predetermined special information is less than a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized by having the following.

As shown in feature A18, if the number of times that a predetermined effect can be executed in a subsequent game round is less than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect is executed at least at the end of the current game round, so that The number of times the predetermined performance is executed from the game time to the subsequent game time can be brought closer to the predetermined number of times.

Feature A19. The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the ball entering the ball entry section,
The gaming states include a first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the ball enters the ball entry section more easily than the first gaming state,
The operation period (variable display time) and notification period (determined display time) of the game repeat operation are configured to be shorter in the second game state than in the first game state,
The effect execution means includes a variable display means (symbol display device 253) that variably displays a pattern on a display screen (display screen 253a), and includes a variable display that variably displays a pattern on the display screen as the predetermined effect. including a stop display that stops displaying the pattern after the variable display;
The variable display period of the symbols in the predetermined performance matches the operating period in the second gaming state, and the stop display period of the symbols in the predetermined presentation matches the notification period in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, monotony of the game can be suppressed by changing the progress speed of the game between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Further, in the first gaming state, it is possible to change the speed of progress of the game in a pseudo manner while maintaining the gaming state, which can contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature A20. In the second gaming state, variable display of symbols is started on the display screen in accordance with the start of the game repeat operation, and after the variable display of the symbol is maintained until the end of the game repeat operation, the above-mentioned granting is started. The design is such that a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is a means for stopping and displaying a pattern in the predetermined effect, and is a means for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the provision determination when the predetermined effect is executed corresponding to the end of a game round. and a means for stopping and displaying a symbol that does not correspond to the result of the award determination when the predetermined effect is executed in response to a time other than the end of a game round. Game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a pattern display similar to the pattern display in the second gaming state can be reproduced in the first gaming state. In other words, even if the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, it can be made to look as if it were in the second gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the speed of progress of the game is changing in a pseudo manner without changing the game state, and this can contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A19 or feature A20, wherein the predetermined performance is a performance similar to a game round performance executed in each game round in the second gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the game round performance in the second gaming state is used for a predetermined performance, the effect of resembling the second gaming state can be more suitably exhibited.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following characteristic group B includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1, for example). Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games. It is.

Feature B1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (jackpot information) (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes processing such as a winning lottery) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than normal. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
Display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to the determination result,
If the result of the determination by the determination means is the transfer compatible result, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition compatible result (symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) is A gaming machine that is displayed in a stopped state on a display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the pictures on the display screen, the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least some of the pictures are being displayed in a variable manner. A special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D) that transitions to a certain reach state is provided,
A predetermined display effect that is executed before entering the ready-to-win state in the game round corresponding to the special variable display mode, and is configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the minimum period until the ready-to-win state is entered. It has a production (for example, the first special production),
The display control means includes:
The number of times the predetermined performance can be executed during a game round is specified based on the period until the transition to the ready-to-win state in the game round corresponding to the special variable display mode and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance. , an execution number determining means (a function for determining a performance pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that determines the number of executions of the predetermined performance in the game round based on the specified result;
It has a performance execution means (a function for executing a first special performance in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that executes the predetermined performance based on the determination by the execution number determination unit before the reach state is reached. A game machine characterized by:

According to feature B1, the number of times a predetermined performance can be executed before transitioning to a ready-to-reach state is specified based on the period until the transition to a ready-to-reach state and the performance execution period of a predetermined performance, and the predetermined number of times is specified based on the identification result. The number of times the performance will be performed is determined. As a result, the predetermined performance is repeated, for example, to the extent possible before shifting to the ready-to-win state. Gaming machines are generally configured to shift to a ready-to-reach state at various timings for reasons such as preventing monotony of the game. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying the extent to which the predetermined effect can be performed based on the determined transition timing to the ready-to-reach state. A predetermined effect can be repeatedly executed in accordance with the mode of transition to a ready-to-reach state. Thereby, the effect of increasing the attention level to the game due to the predetermined performance can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the performance execution means is configured to indicate the degree of expectation of transitioning to the ready-to-win state based on the number of times the predetermined performance is executed.

The number of executions of the predetermined performance is related to the transition to the ready-to-reach state. In such a configuration, the player's attention tends to be directed toward the predetermined effect. Here, by combining with feature B1, if it becomes possible to respond to various transition timings to ready-to-reach states, it is possible to suitably exhibit the suggestion function by the predetermined effect. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature B3. The display control means is configured to indicate the expectation level, which is the transition response result, based on the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, when the predetermined effect is executed continuously;
The special variable display mode includes a first special variable display mode and a second special variable display mode in which the period until the transition to the ready state is longer than that of the first special variable display mode,
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display manner, and the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode if there is no corresponding result.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the result is a transition compatible result, the period until the transition to the reach state is likely to be longer than when the transition compatible result is not, and it is possible to increase the number of times a predetermined performance is executed. Become. On the other hand, if the result is not a transition compatible result, the period until the transition to the ready-to-win state is likely to be shortened, and the number of executions of the predetermined performance will be reduced. According to this configuration, as the number of executions of the predetermined effect increases, the possibility that the result is a transition compatible result increases, and as the number of executions of the predetermined effect decreases, the possibility that the result is a transition compatible result, A relationship is given between the result of the transition determination and the number of times the predetermined performance is performed.

Feature B4. The difference between the period until the transition to the ready-to-win state in the first special variable display mode and the period until the transition to the ready-to-win state in the second special variable display mode is determined by the performance execution of the predetermined production. The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be an integral multiple of the period.

By setting the difference in the transition timing to the ready-to-reach state to an integral multiple (×1, 2, 3...) of the performance execution period of the predetermined performance, the execution period of the predetermined performance can be secured by the difference, It is possible to suppress the configuration from becoming complicated in realizing differentiation between the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode while facilitating the progress of the performance.

Feature B5. The display control means has a transition timing determining means that determines the transition timing to the ready-to-reach state based on the determination result by the transition determining means,
Features B1 to B4 are characterized in that the number of executions determining means is configured to specify a period until transition to the ready-to-reach state based on the transition timing determined by the transition timing determining means. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

It is preferable to set various timings for transition to the ready-to-reach state in order to suppress monotony of the game performance and increase attention to the game. However, if the transition timing becomes diverse, the number of times a predetermined effect can be executed may also vary accordingly. Therefore, as shown in feature B4, in a configuration in which the timing of transition to the reach state is determined based on the transition determination result, the period until the transition to the reach state is determined based on the result, and the period until the transition to the reach state is determined based on the result. By configuring the configuration to determine the number of executions of a predetermined effect based on the above, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature B6. The execution number determining means is a first execution number determining means,
In a game round that does not correspond to the special variable display mode, the number of times the predetermined performance can be executed during a game round is specified based on the period until the end of the game round and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance. , comprising a second execution number determining means for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the game round based on the specified result,
Features B1 to B5 are characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the determination by the first execution number determining means and the determination by the second execution number determining means. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

According to feature B6, in a game round that does not shift to a ready-to-win state, the number of executions of the predetermined performance is determined based on the execution period of the game round and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance. By configuring the predetermined effect to be executed even in the game rounds that do not shift to the ready-to-win state, it is possible to contribute to improving the attention level of the game to players who expect the shift to the ready-to-win state.

In addition, when applying the technical idea shown in Feature A group, it is also possible to use the "second execution number determining means" shown in this feature as the "execution number determining means" shown in Feature A group. .

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the characteristic group A to the characteristic group B described in detail above.

<Feature C group>
The following characteristic group C includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1, for example). Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games. It is.

Feature C1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determining means (main unit) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to granting a benefit to a player; (a function of executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the control device 162);
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means is a period determining means that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation for each game time (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). has
When the game replay operation is being performed, a performance execution means that executes the performance in parallel with the game reuse operation (the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process) function),
The performances executed by the performance execution means include a first predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) and a second predetermined performance (for example, a second special performance or a second special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period. 3 special effect) is provided, and when the first predetermined effect is executed consecutively without the intervention of the second predetermined effect, the degree of expectation that is the imparted response result is suggested by the number of consecutive times. The configuration is as follows.
When the first predetermined performance is executed a plurality of times during one game, the performance execution means interposes the second predetermined performance between the first predetermined performances so as to perform the first predetermined performance in the first predetermined performance. 2. A gaming machine characterized by having means for dividing the game into a first predetermined performance that is performed before the second predetermined performance and a first predetermined performance that is performed after the second predetermined performance.

In a configuration in which the level of expectation, which is a corresponding result of provision, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, there is a concern that the discrepancy between the level of expectation suggested by excessive successive first predetermined effects and the actual game result will become large. Ru. Here, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed, or to replace the beginning or end of the first predetermined effect group with the second predetermined effect, but in such a configuration, the first predetermined effect is not performed. The production effect will not be achieved properly. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and back by intervening the second predetermined effect, it is possible to prevent the opportunities for executing the first predetermined effect from becoming excessively small. , it is possible to suppress the consecutive number from becoming excessively large. Thereby, the above deviation can be suppressed while ensuring the performance effect of the first predetermined performance. Therefore, the first predetermined performance can suitably produce the effect of increasing the attention level to the game.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes winning processing for the actuation opening) that acquires special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions. functions to be executed), acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A grant determination unit that determines whether or not the information corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a benefit to a player (a function that executes processing such as a win/fail lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) ), and the game reuse operation is defined as one game time when the game reuse operation is terminated by the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game reuse operation is started. It is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the operation is performed. In the game machine, the game time control means includes a period determining means for determining the operation period of the game time operation for each game time (a function for executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). ), and has a performance execution means (changed by the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that executes the performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed. a first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period as the effect executed by the effect execution means; Two predetermined performances (for example, a second special performance or a third special performance) are provided, and when the performance execution means executes the first predetermined performance a plurality of times during one game, the performance execution means executes the first predetermined performance. By intervening the second predetermined performance between them, the first predetermined performance can be changed to a first predetermined performance that is performed before the second predetermined performance, and a first predetermined performance that is performed after the second predetermined performance. A gaming machine characterized by having means for dividing the game into two. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the following features C2 to C11 to this configuration.

Feature C2. The effect executing means includes means for setting an upper limit for the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect based on the determination result by the provision determining means, and intervening the second predetermined effect when the upper limit can be reached. The first predetermined performance is divided into a first predetermined performance performed before the second predetermined performance and a first performance performed after the second predetermined performance. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

By setting an upper limit to the number of consecutive first predetermined effects depending on the result of the provision determination, and by intervening the second predetermined effect when the upper limit is exceeded, the first predetermined effect can be applied to, for example, the first half and the second half. By dividing, it is possible to suitably prevent the first predetermined performance from being excessively repeated in a manner that does not match the result of the provision determination.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the second predetermined effect is set such that the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect. .

If an attempt is made to simply insert the second predetermined presentation into the first predetermined presentation group, the interruption of the second predetermined presentation may cause an excess or deficiency in the presentation period. This can be a factor that impairs the smoothness of the performance. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect can be executed in place of the predetermined number of first predetermined effects. Therefore, the above-mentioned excess and deficiency can be suppressed. This ensures that the performance progresses smoothly.

Feature C4. When the first predetermined performance group is divided into front and back by the second predetermined performance, a setting mode for setting an intervening location of the second predetermined performance is a first predetermined performance that is executed before the second predetermined performance. A first setting mode in which the number of times of the first predetermined effect is greater than the number of times of the first predetermined effect to be executed later, and a first setting mode in which the number of times of the first predetermined effect to be executed before the second predetermined effect is greater than the number of times of the first predetermined effect to be executed later. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that a second setting mode is provided in which the number of times is smaller than the number of times.

When intervening with a second predetermined effect, the number of times the first predetermined effect is performed after the second predetermined effect increases as the intervention point is closer to the front, and the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect increases, and the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect increases, and the intervention point is closer to the rear, which increases the number of times the first predetermined effect is performed after the second predetermined effect. The number of times the second predetermined performance is performed after the second predetermined performance is reduced. With a configuration that provides such a difference, it is possible to suitably prevent the performance from becoming monotonous with a configuration in which the first predetermined performance group is divided into two parts by the intervention of the second predetermined performance.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that when the determination result by the grant determining means is the grant correspondence result, the second setting mode is more likely to be set than the first setting mode.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the case of a grant corresponding result, for example, the first predetermined performance is likely to continue in the latter half of the game. In this way, according to the configuration in which the intervention position of the second predetermined performance is determined in accordance with the game result, even though the first predetermined performance is divided into the first half and the second half by the intervention of the second predetermined performance, By strengthening the connection between a series of predetermined effects and, for example, a reach display effect, the original function of suggesting the degree of expectation by repeating the first predetermined effect can be suitably ensured.

Feature C6. information display means (for example, an effect displayed on the display screen 253a) for displaying information corresponding to the number of times that the first predetermined effect has continued;
When the first predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect is executed, the apparatus further comprises means for resetting the number-of-times correspondence information displayed on the information display means. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

By displaying the information corresponding to the number of times when the first predetermined performance is repeated, it becomes easy to understand how many consecutive times the current performance is, even if there is an oversight or the like. When the second predetermined effect intervenes in such a configuration, by resetting the number of times correspondence information, it is made clear that the first predetermined effect has stopped continuing. This makes it clear that the second predetermined performance serves as an opportunity to stop the first predetermined performance, and it is possible to prevent the content from becoming difficult to understand due to the complexity of the performance.

Feature C7. Display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen and then stopping and displaying a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the addition determination. ,
If the result of the determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
The effect execution means performs a display effect using a pattern displayed on the display screen,
The first predetermined effect is configured such that the symbols are variably displayed on the display screen, and the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen in a pattern combination that does not correspond to the assignment correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by executing the first predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game, it is possible to make it appear as if the progress speed of the game has changed significantly. However, in such a configuration, the first predetermined performance is repeated at short intervals, which may cause the game to become monotonous. Therefore, by intervening the second predetermined performance in the first predetermined performance group, monotony of the game can be suppressed. Particularly, in a configuration in which the successive first predetermined effects increase the expectation level as a result of the provision, as shown in feature C1, excessive successive first predetermined effects may confuse the player. This is not desirable because it becomes In this regard, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by having a configuration in which the succession of the first predetermined effect is stopped by the intervention of the second predetermined effect.

Feature C8. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means has a period determining means (a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the game time operation for each game time,
When the game replay operation is being performed, a performance execution means that executes the performance in parallel with the game reuse operation (the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process) function),
The performances executed by the performance execution means include a first predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) and a second predetermined performance (for example, a second special performance or a second special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period. 3 special effects) are provided, and when the first predetermined effects are executed continuously without the intervention of the second predetermined effects, the number of consecutive executions indicates the degree of expectation that is the transition response result. It is composed of
The performance execution means is
When the first predetermined effects are executed multiple times during one game, the second predetermined effects are interposed between the first predetermined effects so that the first predetermined effects are performed before the second predetermined effects. means for dividing into a first predetermined performance to be performed and a first predetermined performance to be performed after the second predetermined performance;
When the first predetermined effects are executed a plurality of times during one game, means for making the first predetermined effects consecutive by arranging the second predetermined effects before or after the first predetermined effects. A gaming machine characterized by:

As shown in feature C8, in the configuration in which the expectation level, which is the result corresponding to the provision, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined performances, the expectation level suggested by excessively consecutive first predetermined performances and the actual game result are different. There is concern that the discrepancy will become larger. Here, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is simply not performed, but in such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect cannot be effectively exhibited. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the second predetermined effect is intervened to suppress the number of consecutive sequences from becoming excessively large, the above-mentioned deviation can be achieved while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of aiming at improving the degree of attention to the game by the first predetermined performance.

Feature C9. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means has a period determining means (a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the game time operation for each game time,
When the game replay operation is being performed, a performance execution means that executes the performance in parallel with the game reuse operation (the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process) function),
The performances executed by the performance execution means include a first predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) and a second predetermined performance (for example, a second special performance or a second special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period. 3 special effects) are provided, and when the first predetermined effects are executed continuously without the intervention of the second predetermined effects, the number of consecutive executions indicates the degree of expectation that is the transition response result. It is composed of
The performance execution means executes the first predetermined performance a plurality of times during one game round, and then executes the second predetermined performance in the game round between the first predetermined performances. 2. A gaming machine characterized by having means for executing a predetermined performance.

As shown in feature C9, in the configuration in which the expectation level, which is the result corresponding to the grant, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined performances, the expectation level suggested by excessively consecutive first predetermined performances and the actual game result are different. There is concern that the discrepancy will become larger. Here, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is simply not performed, but in such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect cannot be effectively exhibited. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the second predetermined effect is intervened to suppress the number of consecutive sequences from becoming excessively large, the above-mentioned deviation can be achieved while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of aiming at improving the degree of attention to the game by the first predetermined performance.

Feature C10. The game states include a first game state and a second game state in which the operation period of the game repeat operation is shorter than that of the first game state,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that is executed once in each game round in the second gaming state,
In the first gaming state, the operating period of each gaming round is configured such that the first predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times,
Features C1 to C9 are characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to execute the first predetermined performance a plurality of times in each game round when the first game state is entered. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

According to feature C10, in the first gaming state, by repeating the first predetermined effect during one gaming round, it is possible to make it appear as if the second gaming state is in effect. In other words, the game progress can be made to appear as if it has accelerated all at once, and the rhythm of the game progress can be greatly changed. Thereby, monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature C11. When the first predetermined performance is executed a plurality of times during one game, the performance execution means interposes the second predetermined performance between the first predetermined performances so as to perform the first predetermined performance in the first predetermined performance. 2. Divided into a first predetermined effect that is executed before the predetermined effect and a first predetermined effect that is executed after the second predetermined effect, and executes the second predetermined effect after the first predetermined effect that is executed after the second predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that the gaming machine has means.

As shown in feature C1 etc., in a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is executed continuously, the number of consecutive first predetermined effects can be increased by continuing the first predetermined effect across the previous and subsequent game times. It may become excessive. For example, when determining the outline of the performance in a later game round, it is possible to prevent the number of consecutive first predetermined performances from becoming excessive by considering the execution status of the first predetermined performance in the previous game round. There is a concern that having a configuration in which the outline of the performance is determined always taking into account the previous game round will increase the control load and increase the restrictions on determining the outline of the performance. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first predetermined performance is divided into two parts by the second predetermined performance, it is possible to finish the performance of one game with the second predetermined performance. Therefore, the influence on subsequent game rounds can be reduced, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, as shown in this feature, when the second predetermined effect is executed multiple times during one game, for example, other than the last second predetermined effect (the second second predetermined effect) It is preferable that the second predetermined effect (the first second predetermined effect) does not correspond to the application response result.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group to the feature C group detailed above.

<Characteristic group D>
The following feature group D includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1, for example). Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games. It is.

Feature D1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination unit (a function for executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the transition information;
Shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than normal based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the transition information. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. and
If the determination result by the determining means is the transition compatible result, the gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition compatible result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transitioning to the special gaming state. There it is,
As a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) that is one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen,
Before the stop display of the picture combination corresponding to the determination result, the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least some of the pictures are being displayed in a variable manner. a first special variable display mode (short) that transitions to a certain reach state;
A second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state is later than the first special variable display mode is provided,
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display manner, and the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result. A gaming machine characterized in that, if the result is not a corresponding result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode.

When variable display of symbols is performed in the special variable display mode, the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state changes depending on the result of transition determination. This can prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In particular, in the case of a transition response result, by proactively delaying the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state, it is possible to suitably earn a period of time for performing performances that arouse expectations regarding the transition to the ready-to-reach state. This can contribute to increasing the attention to the game during the period before the transition to the ready-to-reach state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes winning processing for the actuation opening) that acquires special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions. an acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information. a determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162) for determining whether or not the determination has been made, and a transition correspondence result that determines that the result of determination by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. Based on the fact that function), a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the patterns correspond to the judgment results by the judgment means. a display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that stops and displays the combination of A gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition, wherein a special variable display mode (e.g. As super reach D), before the symbol combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, the symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined symbol combination, and at least some of the A first special variable display mode (short) in which the symbol shifts to a ready-to-reach state where the symbol is displayed variably; and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the ready-to-reach state is later than the first special variable display mode. and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than when the transition compatible result is not the transition compatible result, and the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set. A gaming machine characterized in that when the determination result by the determining means is not the transition compatible result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than when the determination result is the transition compatible result. It is also possible to do so.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function that executes winning processing for the operating opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162)" and an acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information. The determination means (the function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that makes the determination, and the determination result by the determination means has become a transition compatible result that corresponds to the transition information. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than normal based on the display; A display section (design display device 253) having a screen (display screen 253a), and after variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the display screen, the symbols are stopped in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying the information, and when the judgment result by the judgment means is the transition compatible result, the A gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is displayed in a stopped state on the display screen, and the game machine corresponds to the determination result as a special variable display mode that is one of the variable display modes of symbols on the display screen. Before the stop display of the symbol combination, the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen form a part of the predetermined symbol combination, and at least some of the symbols are displayed variably. and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the ready-to-reach state is later than the first special variable display mode, and the variable display means means for setting the variable display mode of the picture to the first special variable display mode when the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, and the determination result by the determining means is not the transition compatible result. and means for setting the variable display mode of the picture pattern to the second special variable display mode.''

Feature D2. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination unit (a function for executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the transition information;
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. and
If the determination result by the determining means is the transition compatible result, the gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition compatible result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transitioning to the special gaming state. There it is,
As a special variable display mode of the symbol (for example, super reach D) executed on the display screen,
Before the stop display of the picture combination corresponding to the determination result, the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least some of the pictures are being displayed in a variable manner. a first special variable display mode (short) that transitions to a certain reach state;
A second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state is later than the first special variable display mode is provided,
A first setting mode (normal effect mode) and a second setting mode (special effect mode) are provided as setting modes of the variable display mode in the normal gaming state,
In the first setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode. ,
In the second setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

When variable display of symbols is performed in the special variable display mode, the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state changes depending on the transition response result and the setting mode. This can prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In particular, in the first setting mode, by configuring the transition timing to the ready-to-reach state to be more likely to be earlier when the result is a transition-compatible result, it is possible to suitably gain the execution period for effects, etc. in the ready-to-reach state, and In the setting mode, by configuring a configuration in which the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state is likely to be delayed when the result is a transition-compatible result, it is possible to suitably earn a period of time for performing performances that encourage the transition to the ready-to-reach state. This can contribute to increasing the attention to the game both during the period during the ready-to-reach state and during the period before shifting to the ready-to-reach state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes winning processing for the actuation opening) that acquires special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions. an acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information. It is assumed that a determination means (a function for executing processing such as a winning lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and a determination result by the determination means correspond to the transition information. Based on the transition compatible result, the gaming state transition means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 changes the gaming state to a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state) a display section (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a); display control means (notification/presentation control device 140 and display control device 410) that stops displaying in a combination corresponding to the determination result, and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition compatible result, A gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transition to the special gaming state, wherein a special variable display mode of symbols executed on the display screen ( For example, as super reach D), before the symbol combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed, the symbol that is being stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined symbol combination, and at least part of the symbol combination corresponds to the determination result. A first special variable display mode (short) in which the symbol shifts to a ready-to-reach state in which the symbol is displayed variably; and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing to shift to the ready-to-reach state is later than in the first special variable display mode. ), and a normal setting mode (normal effect mode) and a special setting mode (special effect mode) are provided as setting modes for the variable display mode in the normal gaming state, and in the special setting mode, The game is characterized in that the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode when the judgment result by the judgment means is the transition compatible result. machine.'' It is also possible.

Feature D3. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode display a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, the first special effect) configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period until the ready-to-reach state is reached. It is configured so that it can be executed twice, and when the predetermined effect is executed continuously, the expectation level, which is the transition response result, is suggested by the number of times the predetermined effect is executed,
The second special variable display mode is set so that the period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the ready-to-reach state is longer than the first special variable display mode. The gaming machine described in D1 or feature D2.

According to feature D3, in the second special variable display mode, the period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the ready-to-reach state is longer than in the first special variable display mode. In other words, in the case of a transition compatible result, the transition to the ready-to-reach state is delayed, thereby increasing the chances of executing the predetermined performance during the period.

Feature D4. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are characterized in that the period until the picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means is stopped and displayed is the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

By making the period the same and changing the transition timing to the ready-to-win state, it is possible to achieve the effects shown in feature D1 and the like while suppressing the complexity of the gaming machine configuration.

Feature D5. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are such that a predetermined effect configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period can be executed multiple times until the reach state is reached. The system is configured such that when the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the expectation level that is the transition response result is indicated based on the number of times the predetermined performance is executed.
The difference between the timing of transitioning to the ready-to-reach state in the first special variable display mode and the timing of transitioning to the ready-to-reach state in the second special variable display mode is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

As shown in feature D5, if the difference in transition timing is set to be an integer multiple of the predetermined period, the predetermined effect can be executed more times by the integer multiple. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent excess or deficiency in the performance execution time due to a difference in the number of times the predetermined performance is performed, that is, distortion in the flow of the performance in any special display mode. This ensures that the performance progresses smoothly.

Feature D6. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode display a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, the first special effect) configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period until the ready-to-reach state is reached. It is configured so that it can be executed twice, and when the predetermined effect is executed continuously, the expectation level, which is the transition response result, is suggested by the number of times the predetermined effect is executed,
comprising upper limit determining means for determining an upper limit of the number of consecutive executions of the predetermined performance based on a determination result by the determining means;
The upper limit determining means is configured such that when the result of the determination by the determining means is the transition compatible result, the upper limit is likely to be higher than when the transition result is not the transition compatible result. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

As shown in feature D6, when the configuration is such that the degree of expectation of the transition response result is suggested by the number of consecutive executions of a predetermined performance, if the period until transition to the ready-to-reach state becomes short, the actual The number of consecutive attempts will be limited. In this case, even if it is originally desired to continue the predetermined performance until it reaches the upper limit, there is a concern that the opportunity to perform the performance will be lost. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in feature D1 etc. is applied to such a configuration, the above-mentioned substantial restrictions can be alleviated.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to C to the feature D group detailed above.

<Characteristic group E>
The following characteristic group E includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1) Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to the game.However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to increase the attention to the game.''This invention was made to solve the problem that It is.

Feature E1. an information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the actuation opening in the main control device 162) that acquires special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes processing such as a winning lottery) that judges whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (win/fail information). function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition compatible result (winning result) that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution) more advantageous to the player than normal. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main controller 162),
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Variable display means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that variably displays a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stops displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. and
If the result of the determination by the determining means is the transition compatible result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition compatible result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transitioning to the special gaming state. And,
As a variable display mode of symbols executed on the display screen when the gaming state is a predetermined gaming state, the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined symbol combination. and a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) in which at least some of the symbols are variably displayed in a ready-to-reach state is provided;
A related information storage means (a continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) that stores information regarding the variable display mode of the previous game round;
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, transition timing determining means (notification/production control A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 442 of the device 140 determines the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display.

According to feature E1, in a game round corresponding to the special variable display mode, the timing of transition to the ready-to-win state is determined according to the variable display mode in the previous game round. In this way, by coordinating the previous game round with the current game round, it is possible to realize diversification of presentation modes. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature E2. In the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period can be executed multiple times until the ready-to-reach state is reached; When the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level that is the transition response result,
The transition timing determining means is configured to determine when the variable display in the previous game round has ended with the predetermined effect and when the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode in the current game round. , The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the timing of transition to the ready-to-win state is determined based on information stored in the related information storage means.

Depending on the execution period of the game round, for example, it may be difficult to earn the number of consecutive predetermined performances in the current game round alone. In a configuration where the degree of expectation, which is a transition response result, is suggested by the number of consecutive times of a predetermined performance, the relationship between the number of consecutive times and the degree of expectation is likely to collapse as such constraints become stronger. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the previous game round has ended with a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round is diverted to the current game round. be able to. In other words, by determining the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state in accordance with the previous game, it is possible to suitably suppress excess or deficiency in the number of consecutive games. Therefore, it is possible to successfully perform the function of suggesting the level of expectation by a series of predetermined performances.

Feature E3. an information acquisition means (a function of executing the winning process for the actuation opening in the main control device 162) that acquires special information (pending information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Judgment means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 executes processing such as a winning lottery) that judges whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (win/fail information). function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition compatible result (winning result) that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution) more advantageous to the player than normal. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Variable display means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that variably displays a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stops displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. and
If the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition compatible result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the transition compatible result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transitioning to the special gaming state. And,
As a variable display mode of symbols executed on the display screen when the gaming state is a predetermined gaming state, the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen form part of the predetermined symbol combination. and a special variable display mode (for example, super reach D) in which at least some of the symbols are variably displayed in a ready-to-reach state is provided;
In the special variable display mode, the predetermined effect configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period can be executed multiple times until the ready-to-reach state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously executed. When executed, the number of executions indicates the expected level of the migration response result,
Related information storage means (continuous result counter in RAM 444 of notification/performance control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined performance in the previous game round;
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, transition timing determining means (notification/production control A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 442 of the device 140 determines the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display.

Depending on the execution period of the game round, for example, it may be difficult to earn the number of consecutive predetermined performances in the current game round alone. In a configuration where the degree of expectation, which is a transition response result, is suggested by the number of consecutive times of a predetermined performance, the relationship between the number of consecutive times and the degree of expectation is likely to collapse as such constraints become stronger. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, by determining the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state in the current game round in consideration of the execution status of the predetermined effect in the previous game round, It becomes possible to use the predetermined effect that has been created for the current game round. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress excess or deficiency in the number of consecutive performances, and to effectively exhibit the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by a succession of predetermined performances.

Feature E4. consecutive number of times specifying means for specifying the number of times the predetermined effect has been executed consecutively until the start of the current game time when the previous game round has ended with the predetermined effect;
and a setting means for setting the number of consecutive times of the predetermined performance in the current game round based on the determination result by the determination means,
Feature E2 characterized in that the transition timing determining means determines the transition timing in the current game round based on the number of times specified by the number of consecutive times specifying means and the number of consecutive times set by the setting means. Or the gaming machine described in feature E3.

According to the configuration shown in feature E4, if the predetermined performance has been repeated until the start of the current game round, the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach state is determined based on the number of consecutive performances and the set number of times in the current game round. be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the function of suggesting the level of expectation by making the predetermined effects consecutive.

Note that "continuously" shown in this feature indicates a case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed without intervening other effects different from the predetermined effect.

Feature E5. A regulating means for regulating the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means when an interval period from the end of the previous game round to the start of the current game round exceeds a reference period (for example, 2 seconds). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

In order to coordinate with the previous gaming session, it is important to determine the transition timing in consideration of the previous gaming session in situations where the interval period is excessively large, which may cause a sense of discomfort in the above coordination. It can be. Therefore, by setting a reference period as a standard for determining whether cooperation is possible, and refraining from unreasonable cooperation when the actual interval period exceeds this reference period, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature E6. Features E1 to E1 characterized in that the game system includes a regulating means for regulating the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means when the previous gaming round is a gaming round corresponding to the transition to the ready-to-reach state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature E5.

If the game transitioned to the ready-to-win state in the previous game round, the end of the game round becomes clear because the result of the current transition determination is displayed with the end of the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, in such a case, by configuring the player not to cooperate with the previous game round, it is possible to suppress the feeling of discomfort caused by unreasonable cooperation.

Feature E7. In the special variable display mode, the predetermined effect configured such that the execution period is a predetermined period can be executed multiple times until the ready-to-reach state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously executed. When executed, the number of executions indicates the expected level of the migration response result,
The transition timing determining means is configured to select one of a plurality of transition timing candidates, and the transition timings are defined so that the difference in timing is an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6.

When adjusting the number of executions of a predetermined performance, as described above, by setting the difference in transition timing to an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined performance, there will be an excess or deficiency in the performance period when adjusting the number of executions of the predetermined performance. can be suitably suppressed.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to D to the feature E group detailed above.

<Characteristics Group F>
The following characteristic group F is described as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1) Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to the game.However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to increase the attention to the game.''This invention was made to solve the problem that It is.

Feature F1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. In a gaming machine equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to
The game time control means includes period determining means (main controller 162) that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation and the maintenance period (determined display time) during which the notification result is maintained for each game time. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
It includes a performance execution means (symbol display device 253) that performs a performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed,
One of the performances is a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the performance execution means executes the predetermined performance during one game. It has a continuous execution means for continuously executing the production,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuous execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect executed at the end of a game round so as to extend over the operation period and the maintenance period of the game round.

According to the configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeated in each game round, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is progressing at a good tempo. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game. Here, if the maintenance period of the notification result corresponding to the result of the provision determination becomes extremely short, it is assumed that the possibility of overlooking the notification result increases. On the other hand, if the maintenance period is simply made longer, the predetermined effects that are repeated at a good tempo will stop between game rounds, which may hinder the ability to achieve the above-mentioned attention level improvement effect.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined effect executed at the end of a game round is executed so as to span the operation period and maintenance period of the game round, so that the predetermined effect will be executed in the next game round. The blank space until restart can be made smaller. Thereby, even if the maintenance period of the notification result is set to be long to some extent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the period.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the operation period is not divisible by the execution period of the predetermined performance.

By establishing a relationship between the execution period of the predetermined effect and the operation period of the repeated game operation as a non-integral multiple, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game cycle spans the operation period and the maintenance period. be able to.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the maintenance period is longer than the remainder when the operation period is divided by the execution period of the predetermined effect.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when game rounds are played consecutively, it is possible to avoid the predetermined effect executed at the end of the previous game round from extending to the next game round. It is preferable to avoid interference with the next game round in order to ensure the relationship between the game round operation and the performance parallel to it.

Feature F4. The gaming states include a first gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (compatible with high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the repeated game operation is shorter than that of the first gaming state. normal gaming state).
The predetermined performance is a performance that is executed once in one game round in the second gaming state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game is configured such that the predetermined effect can be executed multiple times,
Any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to execute the predetermined performance a plurality of times in each game round when the first game state is reached. The gaming machine described in item 1.

According to feature F4, in the first gaming state, by repeating a predetermined effect during one gaming round, it is possible to make it appear as if the second gaming state is in effect. In other words, the game progress can be made to appear as if it has accelerated all at once, and the rhythm of the game progress can be greatly changed. Thereby, monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be more suitably exhibited. If the technical idea shown in feature F1 etc. is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from becoming noticeable.

Feature F5. A display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
After variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen, display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410),
When the predetermined effect is executed at the end of a game round, the symbols are variably displayed on the display screen, and the symbols are displayed in a final manner on the display screen such that the symbols become a symbol combination corresponding to the award corresponding result. It is configured to stop and display, and if it is not executed at the end of a game round, the symbols are variably displayed on the display screen and those symbols are displayed as combinations of symbols that do not correspond to the grant correspondence result. The configuration is such that a temporary stop is displayed on the display screen,
Features F1 to F4 are characterized in that a temporary stop display period during which the temporary stop display is performed and a final stop display period during which the final stop display is performed are configured to be shorter than the sustain period. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

By repeating a predetermined effect (variable display of symbols→temporary stop display), it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing one after another. Since the blank space between the predetermined performances that occurs at the end of a game round can be made smaller, the gap when the predetermined performance is restarted in the next game round can be made less noticeable.

Feature F6. The gaming states include a first gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (compatible with high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the repeated game operation is shorter than that of the first gaming state. normal gaming state).
The predetermined performance is a performance that is executed once in one game round in the second gaming state,
In the first game state, the operation period of each game is configured such that the predetermined effect can be executed multiple times,
The performance execution means is configured to execute the predetermined performance a plurality of times in each game round when the first game state is reached;
The second maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the second gaming state, is configured to be shorter than the first maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein a temporary stop display period during which the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect is the same length as the second maintenance period.

By making the temporary stop display period the same length as the second maintenance period as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be made even more suitable. However, in such a configuration, the difference between the temporary stop display period and the first maintenance period becomes noticeable. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in feature F1 etc. is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from becoming easy to identify from the presentation mode.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature E group to the feature F group described in detail above.

<Feature G group>
The following characteristic group G includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1) Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to the game.However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to increase the attention to the game.''This invention was made to solve the problem that It is.

Feature G1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means includes period determining means (main controller 162) that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation and the maintenance period (determined display time) during which the notification result is maintained for each game time. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
It is provided with a performance execution means (symbol display device 253) that performs a performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed,
The effect execution means includes a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen, the effects are determined by the addition determination means. It has a variable display means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that displays the final stop in a combination corresponding to the result,
The gaming states include a first gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (compatible with high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the repeated game operation is shorter than that of the first gaming state. normal gaming state).
A normal performance mode and a special performance mode are provided as performance modes of the performance execution means in the first gaming state,
In the normal production mode, the display of the picture on the display screen shifts to the first stop display before the end timing of the game repeat operation, and the first stop display occurs at the same timing as the end timing of the game repeat operation. It is configured to transition from the display to the final stop display,
In the special performance mode, the first stop display is regulated, and the display of the picture on the display screen is configured to shift to the last stop display at the same timing as the end timing of the game repeat operation. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first game state where the progress speed is relatively slow, by transitioning from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode, the previous stop display that has been executed up to that point is avoided, and the previous stop display is avoided. The final stop display will be executed without going through the display. This allows it to appear as if the period for which the notification results are maintained has been shortened. In this way, if the game progress speed is changed in a pseudo manner without shortening the period of time during which notification results are maintained by the predetermined notification means, the monotony of the game can be suppressed and attention to the game can be improved. can contribute to

Note that the feature "transitioning from the first stop display to the last stop display" includes a configuration in which the pattern combination displayed in the first stop display is changed to the final stop display.

Feature G2. The maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal performance mode and the special performance mode in the first gaming state, Game machine.

As shown in feature G1, in order to differentiate between the normal production mode and the special production mode by using the temporary stop display → final stop display that is executed in a series, it is necessary to set a maintenance period in both production modes. Even if they are common, the difference in advancing speed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the basic operation of the gaming machine related to the game round control means, and to make it appear as if there is a difference in the progress speed of the game.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .

For example, when providing a difference between the operation period and the maintenance period in each game state, the above-mentioned difference in progress speed can be made clear and sharpness can be emphasized by changing the pattern from variable display to stop display. However, considering that the maintenance period is a period for notifying players of the award determination results, it is not desirable to make the maintenance period extremely short in order to increase such a difference. Making the time extremely long is not preferable because it gives the player the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, it is substantially difficult to increase the above difference. In this regard, such restrictions can be suitably relaxed by making the maintenance period the same regardless of the gaming state and creating a difference based on the first stop display shown in feature G1.

Feature G4. The first stop display is configured such that the same symbol combination as the last stop display is stopped and displayed more often than the last stop display is a different symbol combination. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

As shown in feature G1, etc., in a configuration where the stop display period is made to appear long by making the first stop display → final stop display a series, it becomes clear that the first stop display is only temporary, and the above feature The effect shown in G1 will not be effective. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by mainly using a pattern that directly connects the first stop display to the final stop display, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the first stop display is a part of the final stop display. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the period during which the first stop display is executed is the same as or shorter than the period during which the last stop display is executed. .

When the first stop display changes to the last stop display, the first stop display period becomes excessively long and the deviation from the operation of the predetermined notification means becomes noticeable. There is a concern that this may give the player the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, when the first stop display changes to the last stop display, the occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed by limiting the first stop display period to be equal to or less than the last stop display period.

Feature G6. The maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal performance mode and the special performance mode in the first gaming state,
A predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) configured such that a performance execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided as one of the performances performed by the performance execution means in parallel with the game repeat operation. Ori,
When the special performance mode is set, the performance execution means executes the predetermined performance a plurality of times between the start of the game repetition operation and the end of the game repetition operation, and having means for finally stopping displaying the plurality of pictures in conjunction with the end of the circulation operation;
The predetermined effect includes a configuration in which the plurality of pictures displayed on the display screen are temporarily stopped and displayed after being variably displayed;
Any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that a temporary stop display period when the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect is configured to have the same length as the maintenance period. The gaming machine described in .

In order to make the game appear to progress faster by repeating the variable display of symbols → temporary stop display in the special performance mode, it is not preferable that there be a difference between the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period. This is because the conspicuous difference between the temporary stop display and the final stop display provides an opportunity to determine the timing at which the game round ends. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period are configured to match, even if the predetermined effect is repeated and the game time moves to the next game time, the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period match. It becomes difficult to distinguish between the display and the final stop display, and it becomes difficult to identify the boundary between game rounds. Therefore, the function of generating a pseudo change in the traveling speed can be suitably performed.

Feature G7. The predetermined performance is the same performance as the performance executed in the game round in the second gaming state, and its execution period is the same length as the sum of the operation period and the maintenance period in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature G6, which is configured as follows.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by transitioning to the special performance mode during the first gaming state, it is possible to make it appear as if the game has transitioned to the second gaming state. Here, according to feature G6 and combination, both the temporary stop display and the final stop display in the special performance mode have the same appearance as the final stop display in the second game state, so that the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be suitably achieved. It can be demonstrated.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature F group to the feature G group described in detail above.

<Feature H group>
The following characteristic group H is described as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1) Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to the game.However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to increase the attention to the game.''This invention was made to solve the problem that It is.

Feature H1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determining means (main controller) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result (jackpot result) corresponding to granting a benefit to a player. (a function of executing processing such as a winning lottery on the MPU 402 of the device 162);
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game that is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to On the machine,
The game time control means is a period determining means that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation for each game time (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). has
A performance execution means (MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140 (function to execute variable display control processing)
The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means executes the first predetermined effect during the operation period. It is configured to be executed repeatedly,
The first predetermined performance is configured to suggest the degree of expectation, which is the grant response result, based on the number of times the first predetermined performance has been executed consecutively without the intervention of the second predetermined performance,
Information regarding the operation period when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the provision determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes subject to the provision determination. a means for identifying the destination;
Determining the execution mode of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in the current game round based on the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determining means and the information specified by the destination specifying means. 1. A gaming machine comprising: execution mode determining means.

In the configuration shown in feature H1, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects. Here, if it is attempted to continue the first predetermined performance in the subsequent game round alone, the number of consecutive first predetermined performances will depend on the operating period of the subsequent game round. For this reason, even though the number of consecutive performances of the first predetermined performance should be set to a large number, an event may occur in which the actual number of consecutive performances becomes smaller than the desired number of times. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when determining the execution mode (number of times and arrangement) of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game time, the operation period of the subsequent game time is taken into consideration. Ru. As a result, for example, if it is unlikely that a sufficient number of consecutive first predetermined performances can be secured in the subsequent game round alone, by starting the first predetermined performance in advance in the current game round, it is possible to It is possible to compensate for the shortage in game times. In addition, if the number of consecutive first predetermined performances in the current game round is likely to become excessive by inheriting the number of consecutive first predetermined performances in the current game round, by suppressing the number of consecutive first predetermined performances in the current game round. The occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed.

Feature H2. The destination specifying means stores information regarding a grant determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination. It has the ability to identify at a timing before the
The execution mode determining means specifies the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed in succession from the information specified by the destination specifying means, and based on the specified result and the operation period in the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the execution mode of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in the current game round is determined.

As shown in feature H2, by first specifying the award determination result and the information on the operation period for the subsequent game round, it is possible to grasp the consecutive number of times the first predetermined performance is performed in accordance with the subsequent game round. Based on this, by determining the performance mode for the current game round, the function shown in feature H1 can be more suitably demonstrated.

Feature H3. Display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) that variably displays a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stops displaying the pictures in a picture combination corresponding to the determination result. ) and
If the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the pictures on the display screen, the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least some of the pictures are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a special variable display mode that transitions to a certain reach state,
If the current game round corresponds to the special variable display mode, the execution mode determining means is restricted from determining the execution mode based on the information specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

As shown in feature H3, if the current game round corresponds to the transition to the reach state, by setting the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect according to the later game time, the current game time Restrictions on performance during a game session become greater. There is a concern that this will lead to the effects of this game becoming outdated. Therefore, in such a case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by determining the execution mode of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance without considering the subsequent game rounds.

Feature H4. Display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
Display control means (notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410) that variably displays a plurality of pictures on the display screen and then stops displaying the pictures in a picture combination corresponding to the determination result. ) and
If the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, a gaming machine in which a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the pictures on the display screen, the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute part of the predetermined picture combination, and at least some of the pictures are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a special variable display mode that transitions to a certain reach state,
When the game round that is the object of the target identification corresponds to the special variable display mode, the player specifying means determines the period up to the transition to the ready-to-win state among the operation period in the game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to specify information.

If the subsequent game round corresponds to the special variable display mode (reach), the period during which the predetermined effect can be executed will be greatly limited. In other words, the period during which the predetermined performance can be executed is limited to the period before transition to the ready-to-win state. Therefore, when linking with the current game round as shown in feature H1, it is preferable to link the game round by specifying information regarding the period until the transition to the reach state in the later game round. It can be made into something.

Feature H5. The execution mode determining means is configured to determine, when a subsequent game round corresponds to the special variable display mode, the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determining means and the information specified by the previous specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the gaming machine is configured to determine execution modes of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in the current game round based on the following.

As shown in feature H4, if the subsequent game round supports the special variable display mode (reach), the operation period of the current game round and the period until the transition to the reach state in the subsequent game round are By determining the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round in consideration of the period, the technical idea shown in feature H4 can be suitably realized.

Feature H6. When the execution mode determining means takes into consideration the execution mode in the current game round, when a later game round is taken into consideration, the execution mode determining means determines the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined performance in the current game round. Feature H4 or Feature H5 characterized in that, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is determined, the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in a subsequent game round is determined together. The gaming machine described in .

When coordinating the current game round with a subsequent game round, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which when determining the execution mode for the current game round, the execution mode for the subsequent game round is determined at the same time. . By regulating the modification of the execution mode in subsequent game rounds in this manner, it is possible to avoid the current game round from failing to effectively perform its support function in the subsequent game rounds.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to G to the feature H group detailed above.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature group I is described as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When a prize is won in the actuated opening, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started.If the player wins the lottery, ``In recent years, attention to games has been increasing.'' (Patent Document 1, for example). Various efforts have been made to increase the amount of attention paid to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games. It is.

Feature I1. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. In a gaming machine equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to
The game time control means is a period determining means that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation for each game time (a function that executes a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). has
It includes a performance execution means (symbol display device 253) that performs a performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed,
One of the performances is a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance to a third special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the performance execution means is configured to perform one game. It is possible to perform the predetermined performance multiple times during the game,
a number information storage means (a game number counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) that stores number information that is updated with the execution of the predetermined performance and corresponds to the number of times the predetermined performance has been executed; ,
Means for executing a predetermined game process when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means corresponds to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function for switching between the two.

Regarding the predetermined performance shown in feature I1, the performance execution period is set to be shorter than the operation period of the game repeated operation, and is configured to be executed multiple times during a game round. According to the configuration in which the predetermined performance is repeated at a pitch shorter than the game round, the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is seemingly faster than, for example, when the predetermined game process is executed as a trigger for the progress of the game round. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game is being played, and it can also contribute to the diversification of the timing. As a result, it is possible to realize diversification of game presentations, etc., and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I2. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. In a gaming machine equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to
The game time control means includes period determining means (main controller 162) that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation and the maintenance period (determined display time) during which the notification result is maintained for each game time. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
It includes a performance execution means (symbol display device 253) that performs a performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed,
One of the performances is a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance to a third special performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the performance execution means is configured to perform one game. It is possible to perform the predetermined performance multiple times during the game,
a number information storage means for storing number information corresponding to the number of times the predetermined performance has been performed;
The number information stored in the number information storage means corresponds to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) that is greater than the maximum number of times (for example, 7 times) that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game round. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with means for executing predetermined game processing based on the information (a function of switching the performance mode in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140).

Regarding the predetermined performance shown in feature I1, the performance execution period is set to be shorter than the operation period of the game repeated operation, and is configured to be executed multiple times during a game round. The number of times information is updated by repeating the predetermined effect at a pitch shorter than the game time, and when the predetermined effect is repeated over multiple game times, the predetermined game is completed when the number of times reaches the predetermined number of times. Processing will be executed. According to such a configuration, the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is made to appear faster than when the predetermined game process is executed in response to the progress of a game, for example. It can also contribute to diversifying the timing.

In addition, as shown in this feature, "The predetermined game is executed based on the fact that the number of times stored in the number of times information storage means reaches a predetermined number of times that is greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined performance can be performed in one game round." ``A gaming machine characterized by a means for executing a process.'' was changed from ``A gaming machine characterized by a means for executing a process.'' and a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined number of times is configured to be greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined performance can be performed in one game round. It is possible.

Feature I3. an information acquisition means (a function for executing winning processing for the actuation opening in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of main controller 162) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of main controller 162 (a function that executes processes such as lottery drawing),
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. In a gaming machine equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to
The game time control means includes period determining means (main controller 162) that determines the operation period (variable display time) of the game time operation and the maintenance period (determined display time) during which the notification result is maintained for each game time. has a function of executing variable display time setting processing in the MPU 402 of
It includes a performance execution means (symbol display device 253) that performs a performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed,
The gaming states include a first gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low-frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (compatible with high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the repeated game operation is shorter than that of the first gaming state. normal gaming state).
The performance execution means is
a first execution means for executing a first performance configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period in the first gaming state a plurality of times in a game round in the first gaming state;
a second execution means for executing a second performance whose performance execution period is the same as the operation period in the second gaming state once in a game round in the second gaming state;
a first storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the first performance has been executed;
a second storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the second performance has been executed;
and processing execution means for executing a predetermined game process when the information stored in the first storage means or the second storage means becomes information corresponding to predetermined reference information. A gaming machine with special features.

In the first game state where the progress speed of the game is slower than in the second game state, the first performance is repeatedly executed during one game round, and when the number of executions of the first performance reaches the standard number of times (standard information) A predetermined game process is executed. The progress speed of the pseudo game in the first gaming state can be made closer to that in the second gaming state. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing quickly even in the first game state where the progress speed is normally slow, and this improves the degree of attention to the game in the first game state. I can contribute.

Feature I4. comprising a performance data storage means for storing performance data of a performance executed by the performance execution means,
The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein both the first performance and the second performance are performances executed using predetermined performance data stored in the performance data storage means.

The same performance as the second performance performed in the second game state where the game progresses faster will be reproduced in the first game state, and it will be as if the transition from the first game state to the second game state It can be made to look like this. This can contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature can also be changed to "the gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized in that the first performance is the same performance as the second performance."

Feature I5. A first performance setting mode and a second performance setting mode are provided as performance setting modes of the performance execution means in the first gaming state,
The first execution means is configured to execute the first performance a plurality of times in a game round in the second performance setting mode when the second performance setting mode is set in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or feature I4.

According to feature I5, the configuration is such that the first performance setting mode/second performance setting mode is switched during the first gaming state, and by shifting to the second performance mode, the game can be played in the same way as in the second gaming state. It can be made to appear as if progress is accelerating.

Feature I6. The processing execution means changes the effect setting mode from the second effect setting mode to the first effect setting when the information stored in the first storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to shift to a mode.

According to feature I6, when the first performance performed in the second performance setting mode reaches the reference number of times, the performance setting mode is switched to the first performance setting mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the variety of game progress.

Feature I7. The processing execution means is configured to change the effect setting mode to the first effect setting mode when the information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to feature I7, the behavior in the second performance setting mode of the first gaming state can be brought closer to the behavior of the second gaming state, and the behavior is as if the second gaming state had been shifted to the second gaming state during the first gaming state. You can strengthen the false other effect you show.

Feature I8. comprising reference information setting means for setting the predetermined reference information,
Features I2 to 12 characterized in that the reference information setting means includes means for setting the same information in the first gaming state as the predetermined reference information set in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature I7.

According to feature I8, the behavior can be made similar between the case where the second gaming state becomes the first production mode and the case where the first gaming state (second production mode) becomes the first production mode. This is preferable in order to strengthen the mimicry effect that makes it appear as if the second gaming state has been entered during the first gaming state.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Feature Group A to Feature H to Feature I Group detailed above.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means (game ball firing handle 41) operated by a player, a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a It is equipped with a ball path (guiding path 103) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area, and game parts (game nails 38, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE), and a predetermined part of each game part. A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a passing section (general prize opening 81, etc.).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game area forming body, 82... Variable prize winning device, 83a... Upper operating opening, 83b... Lower operating opening, 87... Main display unit, 91... Electric role Object, 140... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device, 253... Pattern display device, 253a... Display screen, 402... MPU, 403... ROM, 404... RAM, 410... Display control device, 442... MPU, 443 ROM, 444 RAM, ME variable display area, PE gaming area, SE reduced display area.

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a grant determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a benefit to a player;
The game reuse operation is carried out with the time that the game reuse operation ends after the start of the game reuse operation becomes a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining means as one game time. A game machine comprising a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to
The game time control means has a period determining means for determining the operation period of the game time operation for each game time,
The gaming machine is
comprising a performance execution means for performing a performance when the game repeat operation is being performed,
As one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a first predetermined performance is provided, the performance execution period of which is configured to be shorter than the operation period,
comprising an execution number determining means capable of determining the number of executions of the first predetermined effect to be executed during a game round based on specific information corresponding to the operation period;
As the number of executions of the first predetermined performance, the number of executions determining means determines a predetermined number of times that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit number of times corresponding to the type of the specific information based on the determination result by the provision determining means, and It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance,
In a predetermined game round in which the first predetermined effect is executed a predetermined number of times, a second predetermined effect having a longer effect execution period than the first predetermined effect can be executed. A gaming machine featuring:

Images